User’s Guide
PCS Vision Phone VM4050 by Toshiba
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a Word to the T9 Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Entering Characters by Tapping the Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Entering Numbers, Symbols, and Smileys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
2B. Controlling Your Phone’s Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Sound Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Ringer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Selecting the Key Tone Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Adjusting the Phone’s Volume Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Alert Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Silence All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Changing the Text Greeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Changing the Backlight Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
Changing the Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Changing the Sub Display Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Changing the Clock Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Changing the Sub Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Changing the Sub Display Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Location Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Airplane Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
TTY Use With PCS Service From Sprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Phone Setup Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Setting Open to Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Setting Any Key Answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Auto Answer Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Changing the Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Setting Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Setting Phone Book Match Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Setting Abbreviated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Using the Voice Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Displaying Your Phone Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2C. Setting Your Phone’s Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Accessing the Security Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Locking Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Unlocking Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Locking on Power-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Changing the Lock Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Calling in Lock Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Using Special Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Erasing the Internal Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Erasing the Downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Resetting Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Resetting Your Picture Mail Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
2D. Controlling Your Roaming Experience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Understanding Roaming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Setting Your Phone’s Roam Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Controlling Roaming Charges Using Call Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
2E. Navigating Through Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Menu Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Viewing the Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
My Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
2F. Managing Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Viewing History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Call History Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Making a Call From Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Saving a Phone Number From Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Prepending a Phone Number From Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Erasing Call History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2G. Using the Internal Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Internal Phone Book Entry Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Adding a New Internal Phone Book Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
Finding Internal Phone Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Adding a Phone Number or Address to an Internal Phone Book Entry . .79
Editing an Internal Phone Book Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Assigning a Picture to an Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Selecting a Ringer Type for a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82
Secret Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Changing an Icon for a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Changing the Order of Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
Erasing Phone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Erasing Internal Phone Book Entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
Dialing PCS Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Phone Book Match Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
Prepending a Phone Number From the Internal Phone Book . . . . . . . . . .86
Speed Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Using the Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
2H. Personal Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Adding an Event to the Scheduler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Event Alarm Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Event Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
Viewing Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Erasing a Day’s Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Purging Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Purging All Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Using the Alarm Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Using the Countdown Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Using Your Phone’s Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Using the Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2I. Using Your Phone’s Voice Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Using Voice-Activated Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Recording a Voice Dial Tag to Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Erasing All Voice Dial Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
Recording Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105
Playing Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Voice Memo Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106
Erasing All Voice Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
2J. Using Your Phone’s Camera With Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Taking Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
SM
Creating Your Picture Mail Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
Camera Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
Taking Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
Camcorder Mode Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
SM
Sharing Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Sharing Picture Mail From My Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Sharing Picture Mail From Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Sharing Video Mail From My Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Sharing Video Mail From Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Storing Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Viewing Pictures in Your Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
Uploading Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126
Viewing Downloaded Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Assigning Pictures to Phone Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Erasing Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Storing Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Viewing Videos in Your Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Uploading Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Viewing Downloaded Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Erasing Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Managing Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Using the Picture Mail Website . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Managing Online Picture Mail From Your PCS Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Sharing Online Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Accessing Online Picture Mail Options From Your PCS Phone . . . . . . .138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
3A. PCS Service Features: The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Using Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Setting Up Your Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Voicemail Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
New Voicemail Message Alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Voicemail Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
Clearing the Message Icon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Voicemail Menu Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Using Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Responding to Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Making a Three-Way Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Using Call Forwarding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
SM
3B. PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Getting Started With PCS Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Your User Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Launching a PCS Vision Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Net Guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
PCS Vision Connection Status and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
Signing In and Out of PCS Vision Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Updating Your Vision Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Navigating the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
SM
Picture Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Taking Pictures and Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Sharing Picture/Video Mail From Your PCS Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
New Picture/Video Mail Message Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Viewing Incoming Picture/Video Mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Erasing Picture/Video Mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Accessing the Picture Mail Website From Your Computer . . . . . . . . . . .162
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Message Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Accessing the Messaging Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Sending a Text Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
New Message Notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Checking Incoming Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Reviewing Outgoing Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Erasing All Text Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Setting Up for Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Signing Up for Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
PCS Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Using PCS Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Accessing PCS Mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
Composing PCS Mail Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
PCS Short Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Using PCS Short Mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
Chat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Downloading Premium Services Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
Games . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179
Ringers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Screen Savers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Using the Browser Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189
SM
PCS Business Connection Personal Edition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
PCS Vision FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
SM
3C. PCS Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Getting Started With PCS Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Creating Your Own Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
Making a Call With PCS Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information . . .198
4A. Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199
Getting the Most Out of Your Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Caring for the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Maintaining Safe Use of the Travel Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Acknowledging Special Precautions and the FCC Notice . . . . . . . . . . . .209
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
Consumer Information on Wireless Phones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
End User License Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
4B. Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
Manufacturer’s Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Welcome to Sprint
print built the largest all-digital, all-PCS nationwide network with
S
advanced multimedia services, reaching more than 240 million
people for clarity you can see and hear. We built our network to give
you what we believe you really want from a wireless phone: clear
sound, private conversations, and time-saving features.
But with Sprint, you can do something even more far-reaching: simplify
your life. Our advanced technology is designed to grow with your
communications needs, so that one day you'll be able to rely entirely on
your PCS Phone to stay connected.
This guide will familiarize you with our technology and your new
PCS Vision Phone through simple, easy-to-follow instructions. If you
have already reviewed the Start Here Guide, which was packaged with
your new phone, then you're ready to explore the advanced features
outlined in this guide.
If you have not read your Start Here Guide, go to Section One –
Getting Started. This section provides all the information you need
to unlock your phone, set up your voicemail, and much more. It also
contains information on how to contact Sprint if you have any
questions about your service, wish to check your account balance, or
want to purchase additional products or services.
Thank you for choosing Sprint.
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
his User's Guide introduces you to PCS Service and all the features
T
of your new phone. It’s divided into four sections:
ᮣ
Section1: Getting Started
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
Section2: Understanding Your Phone
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
Section4: Safety and Warranty Information
Throughout the guide, you'll find tips that highlight special shortcuts
and timely reminders to help you make the most of your new phone and
service. The Table of Contents and Index will help you locate specific
information quickly.
You'll get the most out of your phone if you read each section. However,
if you'd like to get right to a specific feature, simply turn to that page.
Follow the instructions in that section, and you'll be ready to use your
phone in no time.
Tip: You can print this guide to keep on hand or to view it online. If you're viewing
it online, simply click on a topic in the Table of Contents or Index or on any page
reference. The PDF will automatically display the appropriate page.
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1
Getting Started
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 1A
Setting Up Service
In This Section
ᮣ
GettingStartedWithPCS Service
ᮣ
SettingUpVoicemail
ᮣ
GettingHelp
his section walks you through unlocking your phone, setting up your
Tvoicemail, and contacting Sprint for assistance with your PCS Service.
Section 1: Getting Started
1A: Setting Up Service
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started With PCS Service
DetermineifYourPhoneisAlreadyActivated
If you received your phone in the mail or purchased it at a
Sprint Store, it probably has already been activated. All you need to
do is unlock your phone.
If your phone is not activated, please refer to the Start Here Guide
included with your phone.
UnlockingYourPhone
Follow these steps to unlock your phone:
END
1. Press and hold
to turn the phone on.
MENU
2. Press
. (You will be prompted to enter your lock code, if
your phone is locked.)
3. Enter your four-digit lock code. For security purposes, the code
is not visible as you type.
Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your
Social Security number or PCS Phone Number or try 0000. If none of these work,
call PCS Customer Solutions at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).
Section 1: Getting Started
1A: Setting Up Service
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up Your Voicemail
All unanswered calls to your PCS Phone are automatically transferred
to voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned off. Therefore,
you will want to set up your voicemail and personal greeting as soon
as your PCS Phone is activated.
To set up voicemail:
1
1. Press and hold
.
2. Follow the system prompts to create your pass code, record
your greeting, record your name announcement, and choose
whether to activate One-Touch Message Access (a feature that
1
lets you access messages simply by pressing and holding
bypassing the need for you to enter your pass code).
,
Note: The voicemail setup process may vary in certain Affiliate areas.
For more information about using your voicemail, see
“Using Voicemail” on page 142.
Getting Help
VisitOurWebsite
on PCS Services, options and more.
You can also:
ᮣ
Review coverage maps
ᮣ
Learn how to use voicemail
ᮣ
Access your account information
ᮣ
Purchase accessories
ᮣ
Add additional options to your service plan
ᮣ
Check out frequently asked questions
ᮣ
And more
Section 1: Getting Started
1A: Setting Up Service
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ReachingPCSCustomerSolutions
You can reach PCS Customer Solutions by:
TALK
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
2
Dialing
on your PCS Phone
Calling us toll-free at 1-888-211-4727 (Consumer customers),
1-877-CLEARPY (253-2779) (Clear Pay customers), or
1-888-788-4727 (Business customers)
ᮣ
Writing to us at PCS Customer Solutions, P.O. Box 8077,
London, KY 40742
ReceivingAutomatedInvoicingInformation
For your convenience, your phone gives you access to invoicing
information on your PCS Account. This information includes
balance due, payment received, invoicing cycle, and the number of
minutes used since your last invoicing cycle. (Normal airtime usage
will apply.)
To access this information:
TALK
4
Ⅵ
Press
.
Note: This service may not be available in all Affiliate markets.
PCSDirectoryAssistance
PCS Directory Assistance provides a variety of services, including
residential, business, and government listings; assistance with local
or long-distance calls; movie listings; hotel, restaurant, shopping, and
major local event information. There is a per-call charge and you will
be billed for airtime.
TALK
4
1
1
Ⅵ
Press
.
PCSOperatorServices
PCS Operator Services can provide assistance in placing collect calls
or calls billed to a local telephone calling card or third party.
TALK
0
Ⅵ
Press
.
For more information or to see the latest in products and services,
Note: PCS Operator Services may not be available in all Affiliate markets.
Section 1: Getting Started
1A: Setting Up Service
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Understanding Your
PCS Phone
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2A
Your PCS Phone: The Basics
In This Section
ᮣ
FrontViewofPhone
ᮣ
ViewingtheDisplayScreen
ᮣ
FeaturesofYourPhone
ᮣ
TurningYour PhoneOnandOff
ᮣ
UsingtheBatteryandCharger
ᮣ
DisplayingYourPhoneNumber
ᮣ
MakingandAnsweringCalls
ᮣ
EnteringText
our PCS Phone is packed with features that simplify your life and
Yexpand your ability to stay connected to the people and
information that are important to you. This section will guide you
through the basic functions and calling features of your phone.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front View of Phone
1. LED (green/red)
2. Camera
5. Main
Display
Lens
3. Flash
12. MENU
6. Left
Softkey
13. Right
Softkey
7. Navigation
Key
14. Headset
Jack
8. TALK
9. Volume
Keys
15. END
(Power)
10. Side
Camera
Key
16. OK
17. Camera /
Video Key
11. Speaker-
phone Key
18. BACK
4. Sub Display
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key Functions
1. LED(green/red)blinks green for incoming calls; blinks red for
notifications (messages, voicemail, and alerts).
2. CameraLenslets you take pictures with auto focus function.
3. Flashimproves picture quality in low-light conditions.
4. SubDisplay(LCD)lets you monitor the phone’s status.
5. MainDisplay(LCD)shows the phone’s menus and various features.
6. LeftSoftkeyallows you to select an action or item at the bottom
left of the main display.
7. NavigationKeyscrollsthroughmenusanddisplaysthenextor
ꢀ
previousmenuoption. AlsoactsasashortcutkeyforWeb( ), Find
ꢁ
ꢂ
ᮣ
NameinPhoneBook( ), MyMenu( ), andDownloads( ).
8. TALKallows you to place or to answer a call.
9. VolumeKeysadjust the volume during a call or mute the ringer of
an incoming call.
10. SideCameraKeyactivates Camera mode and takes a picture.
11. SpeakerphoneKeyactivates Speakerphone mode.
12. MENUaccesses the phone’s main menu.
13. RightSoftkeyallows you to select an action or item at the bottom
right of the main display.
14. HeadsetJackallows you to plug in an optional headset for
hands-free use.
15. END(Power)allows you to power the phone on or off, to end
calls, or to return to standby mode from any screen.
16. OKallows you to select highlighted menu items and to confirm
actions.
17. Camera/VideoKeyaccesses the Pictures/Video menu and allows
you to take a picture or a video.
18. BACKallows you to clear an entry or to back up within a menu.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing the Display Screen
Thislistidentifiesthesymbolsyou’llseeonyourdisplayscreen.
ᮣ
shows your current signal strength. The more lines you have,
the stronger your signal.
ᮣ
means your phone cannot find a signal.
ᮣ
tells you a call is in progress.
ᮣ
indicates you are “roaming” off the enhanced
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. (If you are roaming on an analog
system, your phone’s display will show the roaming icon and an
“Analog Roam” text alert.)
ᮣ
indicates you have new text/picture messages.
ᮣ
indicates you have voicemail messages. Press and
1
hold
to call your voicemail box.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
indicates you have new text/picture and voicemail messages.
indicates your PCS Vision connection is active.
indicates your PCS Vision connection is dormant.
indicates the phone is not currently able to access PCS Vision
service features.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
indicates the Location feature is enabled.
indicates the Location feature is disabled.
indicates the Web browser is in secure mode.
indicates Speakerphone mode is active.
indicates Vibrating Alert is active.
indicates TTY mode is active.
shows the level of your battery charge.
indicates your phone is in Airplane Mode.
These additional icons will be displayed in standby mode.
ᮣ
indicates the ringer volume is set to off.
ᮣ
indicates your phone is locked.
ᮣ
indicates Countdown Timer is active.
ᮣ
indicates Alarm Clock is active.
ᮣ
indicates Event Alarm is active.
ᮣ
indicates Auto Answer is active.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Features of Your PCS Vision Phone
VM4050 by Toshiba
Congratulations on the purchase of your PCS Vision Phone VM4050
by Toshiba. This phone is lightweight, easy-to-use, and reliable. It also
offers many significant features and service options:
ᮣ
Dual-band capability provides access to other PCS Digital and
Analog Networks where Sprint has implemented roaming
agreements (page 57).
SM
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
PCS Vision provides access to the wireless Internet in digital
mode (page 188).
PCS Mail and PCS Short Mail provide quick and convenient text
messaging capabilities (page 173).
SM
PCS Voice Command lets you dial phone numbers by speaking
someone’s name or the digits in their phone number (page 195).
Downloadable games, ringers, screen savers, and more allow you
to turn down time into fun time and to personalize your phone
(page 177).
ᮣ
ᮣ
The built-in scheduler lets you schedule alerts to remind you of
important events (page 93).
Three hundred internal Phone Book entries store up to five
phone numbers, three email addresses, and one URL each
(page 74).
ᮣ
Speed Dialing lets you call the phone number stored in the
internal Phone Book with one or two key presses.
ᮣ
The built-in camera with camcorder allows you to take full-color
digital pictures and video, view your pictures and video using the
phone’s display, and instantly share them with family and friends
SM
using Picture Mail service (page 109).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turning Your Phone ON and OFF
TurningYourPhoneOn
END
Ⅵ
Press
for approximately two seconds to turn your
phone on.
Once your phone is on, it displays “Looking for Service” which
indicates that your phone is searching for a signal. When your phone
finds a signal, it automatically enters standby mode – the phone’s idle
state. At this point, you are ready to begin making and receiving calls.
If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a
Power Save feature is automatically activated. When a signal is found,
your phone automatically returns to standby mode.
In Power Save mode, your phone searches for a signal periodically
without your intervention. You can also initiate a search for
PCS Service by pressing any key (when your phone is turned on).
Tip: The Power Save feature helps to conserve your battery power when you are
in an area where there is no signal.
TurningYourPhoneOff
END
Ⅵ
Press
for two seconds until you see the powering down
animation on the display screen.
Your screen remains blank while your phone is off (unless the battery
is charging).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Your Phone’s Battery
BatteryCapacity
Your PCS Phone is equipped with a Lithium Ion (LiIon) battery.
It allows you to recharge your battery before it is fully drained.
The standard battery provides approximately 3.3 hours of
continuous digital talk time (1.5 hours in analog) or approximately
360 hours of continuous digital standby time (18 hours in analog).
The extended battery provides approximately 5.4 hours of
continuous digital talk time (2.4 hours in analog) or approximately
580 hours of continuous digital standby time (29 hours in analog).
When the battery charge is getting too low, the battery icon blinks.
When there are approximately five minutes of talk time left, the
phone sounds an audible alert and then powers down.
Note: Long backlight settings, searching for service, camera/camcorder mode,
vibrate mode, and browser use affect the battery’s talk and standby times.
Tip: Be sure to watch your phone’s battery level indicator and charge the battery
before it runs out of power.
InstallingtheBattery
Your PCS Phone comes with a LiIon battery.
Follow these steps to install it:
1. Press and hold the latch on the phone
and slide the battery cover to remove it.
2. Insert the bottom of the battery pack
into the phone and place it down.
3. Place the battery cover on the phone and
slide it until the latch snaps into place.
Note: Make sure the cover is securely attached to the phone. The battery pack
may separate from the phone if the cover is not properly attached.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RemovingtheBattery
To remove your battery, follow these easy steps:
1. Make sure the power is off so that you don’t lose any stored
numbers or messages.
2. Press and hold the latch on the phone
and slide the battery cover to remove it.
3. To remove the battery pack, lift up
using the tab at the top of the battery.
Tip:Whenusingtheextendedbattery(soldseparately), usethesuppliedbatterycover.
ChargingtheBattery
Your PCS Phone comes with a rechargeable battery. You should
charge the battery as soon as possible so you can begin using
your phone.
Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If your battery
level becomes too low, your phone automatically turns off and you
will lose all the information you were just working on. For a quick
check of your phone’s battery level, glance at the battery charge
indicator located in the upper-right corner of your phone’s display
screen. If the battery charge is getting too low, the battery icon (
blinks and the phone sounds a warning tone.
)
Always use a Sprint-approved desktop charger, travel charger, or
vehicle power adapter to charge your battery.
Warning! Using the wrong battery charger could cause damage to your phone
and void the warranty.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UsingtheTravelCharger
To use the travel charger provided with your phone:
1. Plug the round end of the travel charger into the bottom of the
phone with battery installed.
2. Plug the travel charger into the electrical outlet (AC120V).
ⅷ
The LED indicator lights red while the battery is charging.
ⅷ
The LED indicator turns green when charging is complete.
It takes approximately 2.5 hours for the standard battery and 3.5 hours
for the extended battery to fully recharge when completely drained.
With the Sprint-approved LiIon battery, you can recharge the battery
before it becomes completely run down.
Note: For complete charging, it is recommended that the phone be kept off
during charging.
Note: It is normal for the battery to become warmer during charging.
AC120V
Travel Charger
UsingtheTravelChargerandDesktopHolder
A combination of the travel charger and the desktop holder (sold
separately) provides a convenient way to charge the phone’s battery
as illustrated below.
AC120V
Travel Charger
Desktop Holder
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displaying Your Phone Number
Just in case you forget your phone number, your PCS Phone can
remind you.
To display your phone number:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Information and press
4. Highlight PhoneInfo andpress
.
OK
.
OK
. Yourphonenumberand
otherinformationaboutyourphoneandaccountwillbedisplayed.
MENU
Note: Toaccessthephone’smainmenu, press
fromstandbymode. Menu
itemsmaybeselectedbyhighlightingthemwiththenavigationkeyandpressing
OK
, oryoucanpressthenumbercorrespondingtothemenuitemonyourkeypad.
Making and Answering Calls
Making Calls
Your PCS Phone offers many different ways to make calls, including
SM
PCS Voice Command (page 195), Speed Dialing (page 87), and using
Call History (page 70).
To make a call using your keypad:
1. Make sure your phone is on.
2. Enter a phone number. (If you make a mistake while dialing,
BACK
BACK
press
to erase one digit at a time. Press and hold
to
erase the entire number.)
TALK
3. Press
. (To make a call when you are roaming and
TALK
1
Call Guard is enabled, press
and press
when prompted.
See “Call Guard” on page 61.)
END
4. Press
or close the phone when you are finished.
TALK
Tip: To redial your last outgoing call, press
twice.
Tip: When making calls off the enhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network,
always dial using 11 digits (1 + area code + phone number).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Answering Calls
To answer an incoming call:
1. Make sure your phone is on. (If your phone is off, incoming calls
go to voicemail.)
TALK
2. When your phone rings or vibrates, press
to answer the
incoming call.(Depending on your phone’s settings, you may
also answer incoming calls by opening the phone or by pressing
any digit key.)
Your PCS Phone notifies you of incoming calls in the following ways:
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
The phone rings or vibrates.
The LED flashes green.
The backlight illuminates.
The screen displays an incoming call message.
If available, the phone number of the caller is displayed.
If the phone number is in your internal Phone Book, the Phone
Book entry’s name is displayed.
END
Tip: To mute the ringer or stop the vibrating, press
keys on the side of your phone.
or press any of three
Tip: To answer the call using the speakerphone mode, press
.
AnsweringaRoamCallWithCallGuardEnabled
To answer a call when you are roaming and Call Guard is enabled:
TALK
1
Ⅵ
Press
and press
to answer the call. (See “Call Guard”
on page 61 for additional information.)
Note: If your phone is off, incoming calls go to voicemail.
EndingaCall
To disconnect a call when you are finished:
END
Ⅵ
Close the phone or press
.
Note: When you use the phone with an earphone-microphone or TTY device, you
can continue a call even if the phone is closed.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Missed Call Notification
When an incoming call is not answered, your phone displays the
Missed Call notification. You can view the number of missed calls and
the last caller’s name on the screen.
To dial the last missed call:
TALK
Ⅵ
Press
.
To display the list of missed calls:
OK
Ⅵ
Press
press
. (To dial the phone number, highlight the entry and
.)
TALK
Calling Emergency Numbers
TALK
9
1
1
You can place calls to 911 (dial
and press
), even
if your phone is locked or your account is restricted.
LocatingPositioninEmergencyCalls(GPS)
Your phone supports the system to locate your position when you
make an emergency call to “911”, “ 911”, or “#911” in digital mode.
*
This feature is system dependent. The emergency call is momentarily
interrupted, while the phone receives the GPS (Global Positioning
System) signals.
Important: See “Emergency Calls” on page 211.
EmergencyCallMode
When the emergency number “911”, “ 911”, or “#911” is dialed, the
*
phone enters Emergency Call Mode and will attempt to complete the
emergency call using any available cellular system it can find.
After the call is ended, the phone will enter the Emergency Callback
Mode and attempt to continue to receive service from the cellular
system used to complete the call. “Emergency Callback Mode” will
display.
To exit from the Emergency mode, follow these instructions:
MENU
1. Press
to display options.
OK
2. Highlight ExitEmergency and press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing Options
Dialing options are displayed when you select Options (right softkey)
after entering numbers in the phone’s standby mode.
OK
To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
Call to dial the phone number. (If you are roaming and have the
Call Guard feature activated, you need to take an extra step. See
“Call Guard” on page 61.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
SavePhone# to save the phone number in your internal Phone
Book. (See “Saving a Phone Number” on page 22.)
HardPause to insert a hard pause “P”. (See “Dialing and Saving
Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 23.)
2Sec. Pause to insert a 2-second pause “T”. (See “Dialing and
Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses” on page 23.)
Tip: To speed dial a phone number from standby mode, press and hold the speed
dial number. If the speed dial number is two digits, enter the first digit, then press
and hold the second digit. (This feature will not work when you are roaming and
Call Guard is enabled.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In-Call Options
MENU
During a call, menu options are displayed when you press
.
OK
To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
3-WayCall to call a third party.
ᮣ
Mute to mute the phone’s microphone. (Unmute to reactivate the
microphone.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
EndCall to end the call.
CallHistory to display your phone’s Call History menu.
PhoneBook to display your phone’s Phone Book menu.
Settings to display your phone’s Settings menu.
Information to display your phone’s Information menu.
AdjustingtheEarpieceVolume
Ⅵ
Press the volume keys on the side of your phone during the call.
MutingtheMicrophone
To mute the microphone during a call:
MENU
OK
Ⅵ
Press
, highlight Mute, and press
.
To reactivate the microphone:
MENU
OK
Ⅵ
Press
, highlight Unmute, and press
.
UsingtheSpeakerphoneMode
To activate the speakerphone mode during a call:
Ⅵ
Press
.
To deactivate the speakerphone mode:
Ⅵ
Press
again.
UsingtheVoiceMemo
To record your party’s voice during a call:
1. Press and hold VoiceMemo (left softkey). (The Record screen
appears.)
OK
2. Select Start (left softkey) or press
.
3. Start recording after the beep.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UsingtheScratchPad
You can enter a phone number during a call and save it to the Scratch
Pad memory, so you may dial the number after the call. The Scratch
Pad saves the last three numbers.
To save the phone number to the Scratch Pad:
1. Enter a phone number during a call.
2. Select Options (right softkey).
OK
3. Highlight ScratchPad and press
to save.
To dial the number from the Scratch Pad:
MENU
1. From standby mode, press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight CallHistory and press
3. Highlight ScratchPad and press
.
OK
.
TALK
4. Select the number you want to dial and press
.
Tip: You can also save or prepend a number from Scratch Pad. Just display a
Scratch Pad number and press Options (right softkey) to display options.
End-of-Call Options
After receiving a call from or making a call, the phone number and
the duration of the call are displayed.
TALK
ᮣ
Press
to call again the number while it is displayed.
ᮣ
SelectView (left softkey) to display the internal Phone Book entry
that contains the number (if applicable).
Note: The End-of-Call options are not available for calls identified as
No ID or Restricted.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Saving a Phone Number
Your PCS Phone can store up to five phone numbers in each of 300
internal Phone Book entries. Each entry’s name can contain 36
characters. Your phone automatically sorts the internal Phone Book
entries alphabetically.
To save a number from standby mode:
1. Enter a phone number.
2. Select Options (right softkey).
OK
3. Highlight SavePhone# and press
.
OK
Shortcut: From standby mode, enter a phone number and press
.
OK
4. Highlight NewEntry and press
.
5. Select an icon for the number from the options (
Home,
.
OK
Work,
Mobile, and more) and press
.
OK
6. Highlight the
icon to enter a name and press
OK
7. Enter a name for the entry and press
.
8. Select Save (left softkey) to save the new entry.
Tip: You can also save a number to an existing entry by selecting AddtoContact
on step 4 above.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding a Phone Number
You can search internal Phone Book entries for phone numbers.
To find a phone number:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight FindName and press
. (Your internal Phone Book
list appears.)
4. Press the navigation key left or right to scroll through pages or
enter the first letters of a name to find the entry.
OK
5. Highlight the entry and press
to display phone numbers.
TALK
6. To dial a phone number, highlight it and press
.
Dialing and Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses
You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with
automated systems, such as voicemail or credit card billing numbers.
If you select a hard pause, the next set of numbers are sent when you
TALK
press
. If you select a 2-second pause, your phone automatically
sends the next set of numbers after two seconds.
Note: You can have multiple pauses in a phone number and combine
2-second and hard pauses.
To dial or save phone numbers with pauses:
1. Enter the phone number from standby mode.
2. Select Options (right softkey) and highlight either HardPause or
OK
2Sec. Pauseand press
. Hard pauses are displayed as a “P”
and 2-second pauses as a “T”.
3. Enter additional numbers.
TALK
OK
4. Press
to dial the number or press
to save the number
in your internal Phone Book.
When dialing a number with a hard pause, select SendTone (left
TALK
softkey) or press
to send the next set of numbers.
Note: You can save up to 80 digits for phone numbers with pauses.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing From the Internal Phone Book
To dial directly from an internal Phone Book entry:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
3. Highlight FindName and press
4. Highlight the entry and press
.
OK
.
OK
.
TALK
TALK
5. Highlight the phone number and press
.
OK
Tip: To dial the first phone number in the entry, press
step 4 above.
instead of
in
Using One-Touch/Two-Touch Speed Dialing
When this feature is activated, you can dial Speed Dial entries by using
one key press for locations 2-9 or two key presses for locations 10-99.
(See “Setting Speed Dialing” on page 48 and “Assigning a Speed Dial
Location” on page 87.)
To use One-TouchDialing for Speed Dial locations 2-9:
Ⅵ
Pressandholdtheappropriatekeyforapproximatelyonesecond.
The display confirms that the number has been dialed when it
shows “Calling...”.
To use Two-TouchDialing for Speed Dial locations 10-99:
1. Press the first digit.
2. Press and hold the second digit for approximately one second.
The display confirms that the number has been dialed when it
shows “Calling...”.
Note: Speed dialing is not available when you are roaming with
Call Guard enabled.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Abbreviated Dialing
If you often dial a group of phone numbers that has the same area
code and same prefix, just save them once and activate Abbreviated
Dialing. You will be able to dial a phone number by only entering the
last four (or five) digits. To set up this feature, see “Setting
Abbreviated Dialing” on page 49.
To make a call with Abbreviated Dialing:
1. Enter the last four (or five) digits from standby mode.
TALK
2. Press
to dial. (If a Phonebook Match list appears, highlight
TALK
Abbrev. Dial and press
.)
Note: To make a call by entering last four digits, the first six digits should be preset.
(To make a call by entering last five digits, the first five digits should be preset.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering Text
Selecting a Character Input Mode
Your PCS Phone provides convenient ways to enter words, letters,
punctuation, and numbers whenever you are prompted to enter text
(for example, when adding an internal Phone Book entry or
composing a text message).
The current entry mode is displayed at the bottom of your screen: T9
(T9 mode), abc (abc mode), or 123 (number mode).
To change the character input mode:
1. When you display a screen where you can enter text, press
Options (left softkey).
OK
2. Select a character input mode and press
.
ⅷ
T9 to enter characters using T9 Text Input
(see page 27).
ⅷ
abc to enter characters by tapping the keypad
(see page 28).
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Number to enter numbers (see page 29).
Symbols to enter symbols (see page 29).
Smileys to enter “emoticons” (see page 29).
There are several shortcuts available:
ᮣ
To switch the mode between T9 and abc, press and hold Options
(left softkey).
#
ᮣ
ᮣ
To change to the Number mode, press and hold
To change to the Symbols mode, press and hold
.
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering Characters Using T9 Text Input
T9 Text Input lets you enter text in your PCS Phone by pressing keys
just once per letter. (To select the T9mode when entering text, see
“Selecting a Character Input Mode” on page 26.)
T9 Text Input analyzes the letters you enter using an intuitive word
database and creates a suitable word. (The word may change as you
type.) If the word you want does not display after you have entered all
0Next
the letters, press
to scroll through additional word selections.
#
Space
To accept a word and insert a space, press
.
BACK
If you make a mistake, press
and hold
to erase a single character. Press
BACK
to delete an entire entry when the cursor is at the end
of the text.
Shift
To change the letter case, press
. It appears as
(normal),
(initial cap.), or
(caps. lock).
1
To insert punctuation, press
.
To enter digits, press and hold the digit key.
Adding a Word to the T9 Database
If a word you want to enter does not display as an option when you
are using T9 Text Input, you can add it to the database.
To add a word to the T9 Text Input database:
1. Select the abc character input mode. (See “Selecting a Character
Input Mode” on page 26.)
2. Enter the word using multi-tap text entry. (See “Entering
Characters by Tapping the Keypad” on page 28.) The word will
appear as an option the next time you scroll through options
during T9 Text Input.
For more information about T9 Text Input, visit the Tegic Website at
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering Characters by Tapping the Keypad
To enter characters by tapping the keypad, select the abc mode (see
“Selecting a Character Input Mode” on page26).
Press the corresponding key until the desired character appears.
Shift
To change the letter case, press
(initial cap.), or
. It appears as
(normal),
(caps. lock).
To enter digits, press and hold the digit key.
Characters scroll in the following order:
1
. @ ? 1 ! - , & : ' /
2
A B C 2
3
D E F 3
4
G H I 4
5
J K L 5
6
M N O 6
7
P Q R S 7
8
T U V 8
9
W X Y Z 9
0Next
0
#
Space
Shift
Space
Shift
After a character is entered, the cursor automatically advances to the
next space after one second or when you enter a character on a
different key.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Entering Numbers, Symbols, and Smileys
EnteringNumbers
To enter numbers:
1. Select Options (left softkey).
OK
2. Highlight Number and press
.
3. Press digit keys to enter numbers.
EnteringSymbols
To enter a symbol by selecting from options:
1. Select Options (left softkey).
OK
2. Highlight Symbols and press
.
3. Highlight your desired symbol by using the navigation key and
OK
press
. (You will return to the previous mode.)
OK
Tip: Highlight the
icon and press
to switch to the Smileys mode.
EnteringSmileys
To enter an “emoticon” by selecting from options:
1. Select Options (left softkey).
OK
2. Highlight Smileys and press
.
3. Highlight your desired emoticon by using the navigation key
OK
and press
. (You will return to the previous mode.)
OK
Tip: Highlight the
icon and press
to switch to the Symbols mode.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2A:Your PCS Phone –The Basics
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2B
Controlling Your Phone’s Settings
In This Section
ᮣ
SoundSettings
ᮣ
DisplaySettings
ᮣ
LocationSettings
ᮣ
AirplaneMode
ᮣ
TTYAccess
ᮣ
PhoneSetupOptions
his section describes how you can change your phone’s settings to
Tbest suit your needs. Take a few moments to review these options
and add or adjust the settings that are right for you.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MENU
Reminder: To access the phone’s main menu, press
from standby mode.
Menu items may be selected by highlighting them with the navigation key and
OK
pressing
, or you can press the number corresponding to the menu item on
your keypad.
Sound Settings
Ringer Types
Ringer types help you identify incoming calls and messages. You can
assign ringer types to individual phone book entries, types of calls,
and types of messages (voicemail and text/picture messages).
ᮣ
PreprogrammedRingers include a variety of standard ringer types
and familiar music.
ᮣ
VibratingRinger alerts you to calls or messages without
disturbing others.
ᮣ
DownloadedRingerscan be downloaded right to your phone.
(See “Downloading Premium Services Content” on
page 177 and “Ringers” on page 181.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SelectingRingerTypesforVoiceCalls
Your PCS Phone provides a variety of ringer options which allow you
to customize your ring and volume settings.
To select a ringer type for voice calls so you recognize when a certain
type of call is coming in by the ringer:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Sounds and press
.
OK
4. Highlight RingerType and press
.
OK
5. Highlight VoiceCalls and press
.
6. Highlight WithCallerID, Restricted, NoCallerID, or Roaming and
OK
press
.
OK
7. Highlight one of the categories listed below, and press
.
ⅷ
Pattern1 includes 9 ringer tones.
ⅷ
Pattern2 includes 9 alarm tones.
ⅷ
Melody includes 9 melodies.
ⅷ
Downloads includes downloaded ringers.
ⅷ
VoiceMemo includes sounds you have recorded in standby
mode.
OK
8. Highlight your desired ringer type and press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SelectingaRingerTypeforVoicemailMessages
To select a ringer type for voicemail message alerts:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Sounds and press
.
OK
4. Highlight RingerType and press
.
OK
5. Highlight Voicemail and press
.
OK
6. Highlight one of the categories listed below, and press
.
ⅷ
Pattern1 includes 9 ringer tones.
ⅷ
Pattern2 includes 9 alarm tones.
ⅷ
Melody includes 9 melodies.
ⅷ
Downloads includes downloaded ringers.
ⅷ
VoiceMemo includes sounds you have recorded in standby
mode.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Vibrate sets the vibrating alert.
Off sets no ringer.
OK
7. Highlight your desired ringer type and press
.
Tip: To select the duration of the message alert, see “Alert Notification” on page 36.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SelectingaRingerTypeforText/PictureMessages
To select a ringer type for text/picture message alerts:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Sounds and press
.
OK
4. Highlight RingerType and press
.
OK
5. Highlight TextMsg./Pic. Mail and press
.
OK
6. Highlight one of the categories listed below, and press
.
ⅷ
Pattern1 includes 9 ringer tones.
ⅷ
Pattern2 includes 9 alarm tones.
ⅷ
Melody includes 9 melodies.
ⅷ
Downloads includes downloaded ringers.
ⅷ
VoiceMemo includes sounds you have recorded in standby
mode.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Vibrate sets the vibrating alert.
Off sets no ringer.
OK
7. Highlight your desired ringer type and press
.
Tip: To select the duration of the message alert, see “Alert Notification” on page 36.
Selecting the Key Tone Length
Your phone allows you to select the length of audible tones
accompanying a key press. Longer tone length may be better for tone
recognition when dialing voicemail or other automated systems.
To select the key tone length:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Sounds and press
.
OK
4. Highlight KeyToneLength and press
.
OK
5. Highlight Short or Long and press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjusting the Phone’s Volume Settings
To adjust the ringer, key beep, and power on/off tone volume:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Sounds and press
4. Highlight Volume and press
.
OK
OK
.
.
5. Highlight RingerVolume, KeyVolume, or PowerOn/Off and
OK
press
.
ⅷ
RingerVolume toadjusttheringertonevolumeforvoicecalls,
voicemail message alerts, and text/picture message alerts.
ⅷ
ⅷ
KeyVolume toadjust the key beep tone volume.
PowerOn/Off toadjust the power-on/power-off tone volume.
OK
6. Adjust the volume with the navigation key and press
.
ⅷ
Level5+Vib to set the maximum ringer volume with the
vibrating alert (only appears in the Ringer Volume setting).
ⅷ
ⅷ
Level1-5 to set the volume level (1 to 5).
Vib to switch the ringer to the vibrating alert (only appears
in the Ringer Volume setting).
ⅷ
ⅷ
Off to set the tones to off.
SilenceAll to mute all tones from your phone (only appears
in the Ringer Volume setting). See “Silence All” on page 36.
Note: The Vib or Level 5+Vib option will also be applied to the Scheduler, Alarm
Clock, and Countdown Timer alarms.
To adjust the earpiece and speakerphone volume:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Sounds and press
4. Highlight Volume and press
.
OK
OK
.
.
OK
5. Highlight EarpieceVolume or SpeakerPhone and press
.
OK
6. Adjust the volume with the navigation key and press
.
Tip: You can adjust the ringer volume in standby mode (or the earpiece volume
during a call) by using the volume keys on the side of your phone.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Alert Notification
Your phone comes with several different options to keep you aware
of what's going on by sounding the alert or ringer.
To set the alerts:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Sounds and press
4. Highlight Alerts and press
.
OK
.
OK
.
OK
5. Highlight the alert you want to change and press
.
ⅷ
Service sets the alert to notify you when the network services
OK
parameter changes. Highlight On or Off and press
.
ⅷ
Voicemail sets the duration of the voicemail message alerts.
Highlight Once, 3Sec., 5Sec., 10Sec., 15Sec., or 30Sec. and
OK
press
. (To set the alert off, see “Selecting a Ringer
Type for Voicemail Messages” on page 33.)
ⅷ
TextMsg./Pic. Mail sets the duration of the text/picture
message alerts. Highlight Once, 3Sec., 5Sec., 10Sec., 15Sec.,
OK
or 30Sec. and press
. (To set the alert off, see “Selecting
a Ringer Type for Text/Picture Messages” on page 34.)
ⅷ
ⅷ
MinuteBeep sets a minute reminder that beeps each minute
OK
during a call. Highlight On or Off and press
.
CallLost sets an alert to notify you when your phone loses a
OK
signal during a call. Highlight On or Off and press
.
Silence All
There may be times when you need to silence your phone entirely.
The phone’s Silence All option allows you to mute all sounds without
turning your phone off. This function also disables the vibrating alert.
To activate Silence All:
Ⅵ
Press and hold the volume key down in standby mode. (The
screen will display “Silence All.”)
To deactivate Silence All:
Ⅵ
Press the volume key up and select a desired volume level.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Settings
Changing the Text Greeting
The text greeting can be up to twelve characters and is displayed on
your phone’s screen in standby mode.
To display or change your custom greeting:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Display and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Greeting and press
.
BACK
5. Press and hold
to erase the current greeting.
OK
6. Enter a new greeting and press
. (See “Entering Text” on
page 26.)
Changing the Backlight Settings
The backlight setting lets you select how long the display screen and
keypad are backlit after any key press is made.
To change the main LCD or sub LCD backlight setting for the standby
mode:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Display and press
4. Highlight Backlight and press
.
OK
.
OK
.
OK
5. Highlight MainLCD or SubLCD and press
.
OK
6. Highlight the desired option and press
.
ⅷ
**Sec. turnsthedisplaybacklightonforaspecifiedduration(**).
Tochangetheduration, highlightit, selectEdit (rightsoftkey),
OK
enteranewduration(5to30seconds)andpress
.
ⅷ
ⅷ
FlipOpen keeps the display backlight on, while the phone is
open. (Only appears in Main LCD backlight setting.)
AlwaysOff keeps the display backlight off. (Only appears in
Sub LCD backlight setting.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the main LCD backlight setting during a call:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Display and press
4. Highlight Backlight and press
.
OK
.
OK
.
OK
5. Highlight InUse and press
.
OK
6. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
Normal operates the same as the Main LCD backlight setting
(Standby).
ⅷ
AlwaysOn keeps the display backlight on until you finish
the call.
To change the keypad backlight setting:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Display and press
4. Highlight Backlight and press
5. Highlight Keypad and press
.
OK
OK
.
OK
.
.
OK
6. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
**Sec. turnsthekeypadbacklightonforaspecifiedduration(**).
Tochangetheduration, highlightit, selectEdit (rightsoftkey),
OK
enteranewduration(5to30seconds)thenpress
.
ⅷ
ⅷ
FlipOpen keeps the keypad backlight on, while the phone
is open.
AlwaysOff keeps the keypad backlight off.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To set the backlight brightness of the main display:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Display and press
4. Highlight Backlight and press
.
OK
.
OK
.
OK
5. Highlight Brightness and press
.
OK
6. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
Normal sets the Normal mode.
ⅷ
PowerSave sets the Power Save mode.
Note:Longbacklightsettingsaffectthebattery’stalkandstandbytimes.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Screen Saver
YournewPCSPhoneoffersyou the option of displaying a screen saver
while in standby mode.
To assign a screen saver:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Display and press
.
OK
4. Highlight ScreenSaver and press
.
OK
5. Highlight the desired mode from options and press
.
ⅷ
Always to display a screen saver until you change it.
ⅷ
Weekly to display different screen saver on each day of the
week. Highlight Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday,
OK
Friday, Saturday, or Sunday, and press
.
ⅷ
SpecialDays to display the screen saver on the special day
(up to 10 days). To set the special day, enter the month and
OK
the day and press
every year.)
. (The screen saver appears on the day
Note: If you set up two or more options, the phone will display a screen saver of
Special Days, Weekly, or Always in this priority on individual days.
OK
6. Highlight your desired display image and press
.
ⅷ
Off sets no screen saver. (Only appears in Always and Weekly.)
ⅷ
Pattern includes eight patterns. From the image list,
highlight an item and select View (left softkey) to display
the image. (Press the navigation key right or left to display
OK
another image.) Press
to set it to the screen saver.
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Dwnld. ScreenSaver includes downloaded images. Highlight
your desired image, select Select (left softkey), and press
OK
to set it to the screen saver.
InCamera includes saved pictures taken by camera feature.
Highlight your desired picture, select Select (left softkey),
OK
and press
to set it to the screen saver.
Dwnld. /Assigned includes downloaded pictures. Highlight
your desired picture, select Select (left softkey), and press
OK
to set it to the screen saver.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ManagingScreenSaversforSpecialDays
Once you have assigned screen savers to your special days, you can
use the Screen Savers menu to view and manage your Special Days
screen savers.
To manage your Special Days screen savers:
MENU
1 Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Display and press
.
OK
OK
4. Highlight ScreenSaver and press
.
5. Highlight SpecialDays and press
.
6. Select List (left softkey) to display assigned Special Days.
7. Use your navigation key to highlight your desired day.
8. To view the assigned screen saver, select View (left softkey).
– or –
To view options, select Options (right softkey).
ⅷ
Property to view the assigned screen saver properties.
ⅷ
Erase to erase the selected special day.
Changing the Sub Display Contrast
To adjust the sub display’s contrast:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Display and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Contrast(Sub) and press
.
5. Adjust the contrast by pressing the navigation key up or down
OK
and press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Clock Display
To change the clock’s appearance on the standby screen:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Display and press
.
OK
4. Highlight IdleScreen and press
.
OK
5. Highlight MainLCD and press
.
OK
6. Highlight the desired clock image and press
.
ⅷ
LargeDigital displays a large digital clock.
ⅷ
SmallAnalog displays a small analog clock.
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Calendar displays a calendar of the current month.
SmallDigital displays a small digital clock.
NoDate&Clock displays no date and no clock.
LargeAnalog displays a large analog clock.
NoGuidance displays no softkey label.
When the list is displayed, you can view the image by selecting View
(left softkey). You can view the next or previous image by pressing
the navigation key right or left.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Sub Display Screen
Your new PCS Phone offers options for what you see on the sub
display screen when in standby mode.
To change the sub display images:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Display and press
.
OK
4. Highlight IdleScreen and press
.
OK
5. Highlight SubLCD and press
.
OK
6. Highlight the desired screen image and press
.
ⅷ
Digital1-3 displays a digital clock.
ⅷ
Analog displays an analog clock.
ⅷ
Digital&Analog displays a digital and analog clocks.
ⅷ
Pattern includes four clock patterns. From the image list,
highlight an item and select View (left softkey) to display
the image. (Press the navigation key right or left to display
OK
another image.) Press
to set it to the screen saver.
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Dwnld. ScreenSaver includes downloaded images. Highlight
your desired image, select Select (left softkey), and press
OK
to set it to the screen saver.
InCamera includes saved pictures taken by camera feature.
Highlight your desired image, select Select (left softkey),
OK
and press
to set it to the screen saver.
Dwnld. /Assigned includes downloaded pictures. Highlight
your desired image, select Select (left softkey), and press
OK
to set it to the screen saver.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing the Sub Display Direction
To change the sub display direction when the clamshell is closed:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Display and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Direction(Sub) and press
.
OK
5. Highlight the desired option and press
.
ⅷ
Upward displays information normally when the antenna
points upward.
ⅷ
Downward displays information normally when the antenna
points downward.
Location Settings
Your PCS Phone is equipped with a Location feature for use in
connection with location-based services that may be available
in the future.
The Location feature allows the network to detect your position.
Turning Location off will hide your location from everyone
except 911.
Note: Even if the Location feature is enabled, no service may use your location
without your expressed permission.
To enable or disable your phone’s Location feature:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Location and press
4. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
.
OK
. (A message will display.)
5. Read the message (pressing the navigation key down to scroll)
OK
and press
.
OK
6. Highlight On or Off and press
.
When the Location feature is on, your phone’s standby screen will
display the
display.
icon. When Location is turned off, the
icon will
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airplane Mode
When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive any
calls or access online information. You may still use the phone’s other
features, such as Games, Scheduler, Voice Memos, Camera,
Camcorder, etc., while you are in Airplane Mode.
To set your phone to Airplane Mode:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Others and press
.
OK
4. Highlight AirplaneMode and press
. (A message will display.)
OK
5. Read the message and press
.
OK
6. Highlight On or Off and press
.
While in Airplane Mode, your phone’s screen will display “Phone off.”
TTY Use With PCS Service From Sprint
A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone), is a
telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or hard
of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to
communicate by telephone.
Your phone is compatible with select TTY devices. Please check with
the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it supports digital
wireless transmission. Your phone and TTY device will connect via a
special cable that plugs into your phone's headset jack. If this cable
was not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device
manufacturer to purchase the connector cable.
When establishing your PCS Service, please call PCS Customer
Solutions via the state Telecommunications Relay Service (TRS) by
TALK
7
1
1
first dialing
this number: 866-727-4889.
. Then provide the state TRS with
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To turn TTY Mode on or off:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Others and press
.
OK
.
OK
4. Highlight TTY and press
. (A message will display.)
#
#
OK
8
8
9
Shortcut: From standby mode, press
and
.
OK
5. Read the message and press
.
OK
6. Highlight Enable or Disable and press
.
Note: When TTY mode is enabled and a TTY device is connected to the phone's
jack, your phone will display
.
Note: If TTY mode is enabled, the audio quality of non-TTY devices connected to
the headset jack may be impaired.
Note: Before connecting or disconnecting a cable of the TTY device to or from
the phone, make sure that the power of the TTY device is turned off. Otherwise,
the phone may malfunction.
IMPORTANT NOTICE: 911 Emergency Calling
Sprint recommends that TTY users make emergency calls by other means
including Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS), analog cellular, and
landline communications. Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted when
received by public safety answering points (PSAPs) rendering some
communications unintelligible. The problem encountered appears related to TTY
equipment or software used by PSAPs. This matter has been brought to the
attention of the FCC, and the wireless industry and PSAP community are
currently working to resolve this.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phone Setup Options
Setting Open to Answer
This feature enables you to answer incoming calls by opening the
TALK
clamshell so that you don't have to press
.
To activate or deactivate this feature:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Others and press
.
OK
4. Highlight OpentoAnswer and press
.
OK
5. Highlight On or Off and press
.
Setting Any Key Answer
This feature allows you to answer incoming calls by pressing any
digit key.
To activate or deactivate this feature:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Others and press
.
OK
4. Highlight AnyKeyAnswer and press
.
OK
5. Highlight On or Off and press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Auto Answer Mode
This feature automatically answers incoming calls after a specified
duration, when this feature is activated and an external device is
connected to the phone’s jack.
To activate or deactivate this feature:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Others and press
.
OK
4. Highlight AutoAnswer and press
.
OK
5. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
**Sec. activates the function with a specified duration (**).
To change the duration, highlight it, select Edit (right
softkey), enter a new duration (5 to 30 seconds) and
OK
press
.
ⅷ
Off cancels the function.
Changing the Language
Your PCS Phone can display menu options in both English and
Spanish. The default menu language is English.
To select English or Spanish for your phone's display:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings (Configuración) and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Others (Otros) and press
4. Highlight Language (Idioma) and press
5. Highlight English or Español and press
.
OK
OK
.
.
Setting Speed Dialing
To enable or disable Speed Dialing (page 87):
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Others and press
.
OK
4. Highlight SpeedDial and press
.
OK
5. Highlight Enable or Disable and press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Phone Book Match Dialing
To enable or disable Phone Book Match Dialing (page 86):
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Display and press
.
OK
OK
4. Highlight PhonebookMatch and press
.
5. Highlight Enable or Disable and press
.
Setting Abbreviated Dialing
To activate Abbreviated Dialing (page 25):
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Others and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Abbrev. Dial and press
.
5. Highlight Empty (or a current number) and select Edit (right
softkey).
OK
6. Enter the first six (or five) digits and press
.
To deactivate this feature:
1. Follow steps 1 to 4 above.
OK
2. Highlight Off and press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Voice Guidance
Your phone offers voice guidance capability that informs you of the
phone’s status and other information in voice and notifies you of
several events in beep tones. Voice guidance is only available in
English.
To activate or deactivate the voice guidance mode:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight VoiceGuidance and press
.
OK
4. Read the message and press
.
OK
5. Highlight VoiceGuidance again and press
.
OK
6. Highlight On or Off and press
.
MENU
Shortcut: From standby mode, press and hold
to activate or deactivate the
voice guidance mode. (The phone beeps twice when activated; beeps once
when deactivated.)
Note: The voice guidance volume is based on your phone's Ringer Volume. If the
phone's Ringer Volume is Off or Vib, the voice guidance will be muted. (When you
MENU
press and hold
, the phone vibrates to notify you that no voice guidance is
available. It vibrates twice for activation or once for deactivation.)
Note: If Silence All is active, you have no voice guidance, beep tone, or vibrating
notification.
To set up the voice guidance options:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight VoiceGuidance and press
.
OK
4. Read the message and press
.
OK
5. Highlight Settings and press
to display options.
OK
6. Highlight the option and press
. To activate or deactivate
OK
the option, highlight On or Off and press
.
ⅷ
HandsetStatus tells you the phone’s status (the battery level,
signal strength, roaming status, missed call notification,
new incoming messages, and phone locked).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ⅷ
In/OutCall#Guide tells you who is calling you or whom you
are calling. (The phone reads out a phone number or a
name displayed on the screen.)
ⅷ
ⅷ
CallHistoryGuide readsoutthecallhistorywhenyoudisplayit.
IdleModeGuide beeps when the phone returns to standby
mode.
ⅷ
ⅷ
MenuPositionGuide beeps when the first menu item is
highlighted by scrolling the menu down.
CallGuardGuide tells you that you are making or answering a
call with Call Guard enabled.
To listen to the guidance on the handset status:
OK
Ⅵ
Pressandhold
fromstandbymode. (Boththevoiceguidance
modeandthehandsetstatusoptionshouldbeactivatedinadvance.)
Note: The voice guidance volume is based on your phone's Ringer Volume. If the
phone's Ringer Volume is Off or Vib, the phone vibrates once to notify you that no
voice guidance is available.
Displaying Your Phone Information
To display your phone information:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Information and press
.
OK
4. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
PhoneInfo to display your phone number, current
username, and other information about your phone by
pressing the navigation key up or down.
ⅷ
LegendofIcons to display the legend of icons by pressing the
navigation key up or down.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2B: ControllingYour Phone’s Settings
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2C
Setting Your Phone’s Security
In This Section
ᮣ
AccessingtheSecurityMenu
ᮣ
LockingYourPhone
ᮣ
UnlockingYourPhone
ᮣ
UsingSpecialNumbers
y using the security settings on your PCS Phone, you receive peace
Bof mind without sacrificing flexibility. With several options
available, you can customize your phone to meet your personal needs.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2C: SettingYour Phone’s Security
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing the Security Menu
You must enter your lock code to view the Security menu.
To access the Security menu:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
.
OK
3. Highlight Security and press
4. Enter your four-digit lock code. (The Security menu displays.)
Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your
Social Security number or PCS Phone Number or try 0000. If none of these work,
call PCS Customer Solutions at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).
Locking Your Phone
When your phone is locked, you can only receive incoming calls or
make calls to 911, PCS Customer Solutions, or special numbers.
To lock your phone:
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on
OK
page 53), highlight LockPhone and press
.
OK
2. Highlight LockNow and press
. (The
icon will appear.)
Note: The phone will remain locked even if the power is turned off and on.
Unlocking Your Phone
To unlock your phone:
MENU
1. Press
. (You will be prompted to enter your lock code, if
your phone is locked.)
2. Enter your four-digit lock code.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2C: SettingYour Phone’s Security
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Locking on Power-up
When this feature is activated, the phone automatically locks every
time after it is turned on. To operate, the four-digit lock code must be
entered.
To activate this feature:
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on
OK
page 53), highlight LockPhone and press
.
OK
2. Highlight OnPower-up and press
.
To deactivate this feature:
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on
OK
page 53), highlight LockPhone and press
.
OK
2. Highlight Unlock and press
.
Changing the Lock Code
To change your lock code:
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on
OK
page 53), highlight ChangeLock and press
2. Enter your new four-digit lock code.
3. Re-enter your new lock code.
.
Calling in Lock Mode
You can place calls to 911 and to your special numbers when in
lock mode.
To place an outgoing call in lock mode:
Ⅵ
To call an emergency number, special number, or PCS Customer
TALK
Solutions, enter the phone number and press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2C: SettingYour Phone’s Security
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Special Numbers
You can save three special numbers in addition to your internal
Phone Book entries (the same number may be in both directories).
You can make and receive calls from special numbers even when
your phone is locked.
To add or replace a special number:
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on
OK
page 53), highlight Special#s and press
.
OK
2. Highlight a special number’s entry (#1, #2, or #3) and press
.
OK
3. Enter the phone number and press
.
Note:TherearenoSpeedDialoptionsassociatedwithspecialnumbers.
Erasing the Internal Phone Book
To erase all the names and phone numbers in your internal Phone
Book:
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on
OK
page 53), highlight ErasePhoneBook and press
. (You will
be prompted to confirm.)
OK
2. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Erasing the Downloads
You can erase all the downloaded contents (games, ringers, screen
savers, and applications) from the Downloads folder, all the pictures
from the My Pictures - Downloaded/Assigned folder, and all the
videos from the My Video - Downloaded/Saved folder at one time.
This function also erases the contents preloaded into the Downloads
folder (if applicable).
To erase contents from these folders:
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on
OK
page 53), highlight EraseDownloads and press
. (You will
be prompted to confirm.)
OK
2. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Note: IfyouperformtheEraseDownloadsfunction, yourphonewillnolongersound
ordisplaythecontents(ringers, screensavers, orpictures)thatyouhaveassigned
tothephonetasks.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2C: SettingYour Phone’s Security
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Resetting Your Phone
Resetting the phone restores all the factory defaults, including the
ringer types and display settings. The internal Phone Book, Call
History, Scheduler, and Messaging are not affected.
To reset your phone:
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on
OK
page 53), highlight ResetPhone and press
. (You will be
prompted to confirm.)
OK
2. Highlight Yes and press
to reset.
Resetting Your Picture Mail Password
To clear your Picture Mail password from your phone:
1. From the Security menu (see “Accessing the Security Menu” on
OK
page 53), highlight ResetPictures/Video and press
. (You
will be prompted to confirm.)
OK
2. Highlight Yes and press
to clear.
Note: You will be prompted to re-enter your Picture Mail password to access
your Picture Mail account first time after resetting the password.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2C: SettingYour Phone’s Security
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2D
Controlling Your Roaming
Experience
In This Section
ᮣ
UnderstandingRoaming
ᮣ
SettingYourPhone’sRoamMode
ᮣ
ControllingRoamingChargesUsingCallGuard
oaming is the ability to make or receive calls when you’re off the
Renhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. Your new dual band/tri
mode PCS Phone works anywhere on the enhanced Sprint Nationwide
PCS Network and allows you to roam on other analog and 1900 and 800
MHz digital networks where we've implemented roaming agreements
with other carriers.
This section explains how roaming works as well as special features that
let you manage your roaming experience.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2D: ControllingYour Roaming Experience
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Understanding Roaming
RecognizingIconsontheDisplayScreen
Your phone’s display screen always lets you know when you’re off
the enhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network and whether your
phone is operating in analog or digital mode. The following chart
indicates what you’ll see depending on where you’re using your
phone.
Roaming
Indicator
Analog
Indicator
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network
Other Digital Networks
Analog Networks
– Analog Roam –
Tip: Remember, when you are using your phone off the Sprint Nationwide
PCS Network, always dial numbers using 11 digits (1 + area code + number).
Note: You will pay a higher per-minute rate for roaming calls.
RoamingonOtherDigitalNetworks
When you’re roaming on digital networks, your call quality and
security will be similar to the quality you receive when making calls
on the enhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. You may not be
able to access certain features, such as PCS Vision.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2D: ControllingYour Roaming Experience
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RoamingonAnalogNetworks
When you roam on analog networks, you will experience a similar
quality provided by other analog carriers today. Although some
features, such as PCS Vision and PCS Voice Command, will be
unavailable, you can still make and receive calls and access voicemail.
You will experience a few differences:
ᮣ
You are more likely to experience static, cross-talk, fade-out, and
dropped calls.
ᮣ
Some features which are standard on the enhanced
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network, such as call waiting,
PCS Vision, and direct international dialing, are unavailable.
ᮣ
Though callers can leave voicemail messages while you are
roaming, you will not receive notification until you return to the
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. While roaming, you can
periodically check your voicemail for new messages by dialing
1+area code+your PCS Phone Number. Press
when you hear
your greeting and enter your pass code at the prompt.
ᮣ
ᮣ
There are security and privacy risks (eavesdropping and cloning)
that exist with conventional analog services today.
Your battery needs recharging sooner when you use your phone
for analog roaming.
Note: If you’re on a call when you leave the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network
and enter an area where roaming is available (whether digital or analog),
your call is dropped. If your call is dropped in an area where you think
PCS Service is available, turn your phone off and on again to reconnect to
the Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.
Note: When using your phone in analog mode, the handset may feel warm. This
behavior is normal for analog operation.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2D: ControllingYour Roaming Experience
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Your Phone’s Roam Mode
Your PCS Phone allows you to control your ability to roam. By using
the Roaming menu option, you can determine which signals your
phone accepts.
SetMode
Choose from three different settings on your dual-band/tri-mode
phone to control your roaming experience:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Roaming and press
4. Highlight SetMode and press
.
OK
.
OK
.
OK
5. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
Sprint: This setting allows you to access the enhanced Sprint
Nationwide PCS Network only and prevents roaming on
other networks.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Automatic: This setting seeks PCS Service. When
PCS Service is unavailable, the phone searches for an
alternate system.
Analog: This setting forces the phone to seek an analog
roaming system. The previous setting (Sprint or Automatic)
is restored the next time the phone is turned on.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2D: ControllingYour Roaming Experience
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Controlling Roaming Charges Using
Call Guard
In addition to the roaming icon, Call Guard alerts you when roaming
charges apply. This feature makes it easy to manage your roaming
charges by reminding you when you make or receive roaming calls. It
also requires you to take an additional step before placing or
answering a roaming call. This additional step is not required when
you make or receive calls while on the enhanced Sprint Nationwide
PCS Network.
To turn Call Guard on or off:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight Roaming and press
4. Highlight CallGuard and press
5. Highlight On or Off and press
.
OK
.
OK
. (A message will appear.)
OK
.
Note: Voice Dialing and Speed Dialing are not available when you are roaming
with Call Guard enabled.
To place roaming calls with Call Guard on:
1. From standby mode, dial 1 + area code + the seven-digit number
TALK
and press
. (You can also initiate a call from the internal
Phone Book or Call History.)
1
2. When the prompt appears, press
to proceed.
ToanswerincomingroamingcallswithCallGuardon:
TALK
1. Press
.
1
2. When the prompt appears, press
to proceed.
Remember if the Call Guard feature is set to On, you need to take extra
steps to make and receive roaming calls even if you have selected the
Analogsetting (see page 60).
Tip: See “Prepending a Phone Number From the Internal Phone Book” on page 86
and “Prepending a Phone Number From Call History” on page 73.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2D: ControllingYour Roaming Experience
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2E
Navigating Through Menus
In This Section
ᮣ
MenuNavigation
ᮣ
MenuStructure
ᮣ
ViewingtheMenus
his section is a road map to using your PCS Phone. Every function
Tand feature can be accessed through an onscreen menu. Take
a few moments to learn your way around and you’ll find your phone
easier to use.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2E: NavigatingThrough Menus
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu Navigation
The navigation key on your PCS Phone allows you to scroll through
menus quickly and easily.
To navigate through a menu, simply press the navigation key up or
down.
Menu Structure
SelectingMenuItems
As you navigate through the menu, menu options are highlighted.
Select any numbered option by simply pressing the corresponding
number on the phone’s keypad. You may also select any item by
OK
highlighting it and pressing
.
For example, if you want to view your last incoming call:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
1
2. Select CallHistory by pressing
pressing
or by highlighting it and
OK
. (It may already be highlighted.)
2
3. Select IncomingCalls by pressing
pressing
or by highlighting it and
OK
. If you have received any calls, they are displayed
on the screen.
BackingUpWithinaMenu
To go to the previous menu:
BACK
Ⅵ
Press
.
To return to standby mode:
END
Ⅵ
Press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2E: NavigatingThrough Menus
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MainMenu'sView
The Main Menu appears in two ways: thumbnail view and list view.
To switch the Main Menu between the thumbnail view and list view,
select Options (right softkey) from the Main Menu display, highlight
OK
ThumbnailView or ListView, and press
.
MainMenuOptionsinThumbnailView
From the thumbnail view of the Main Menu, select Options (right
softkey) to display menu options. To select an option, highlight it and
OK
press
.
ᮣ
ListView to switch the main menu screen into the list view.
ᮣ
ᮣ
SetScreenSaver to select the background view from options (Off,
Pattern, Dwnld. ScreenSaver, InCamera, and Dwnld./Assigned).
SetButtonIcon to select an image for an individual box from
options (Off, Pattern, Dwnld. ScreenSaver, InCamera, and
Dwnld./Assigned).
ᮣ
TitleView to turn the menu titles on the thumbnail view On or Off.
MainMenuOptionsinListView
From the list view of the Main Menu, select Options (right softkey) to
OK
display menu options. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
ThumbnailView to switch the main menu screen into the
thumbnail view.
ᮣ
SetScreenSaver to select the background view from options (Off,
Pattern, Dwnld. ScreenSaver, InCamera, and Dwnld./Assigned).
ThumbnailView
ListView
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2E: NavigatingThrough Menus
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing the Menus
MenuDiagram
The following list outlines your phone’s menu structure.
1. Call History
1. Outgoing Calls
2. Incoming Calls
3. Missed Calls
4. Scratch Pad
5. Erase History
1. Outgoing Calls
2. Incoming Calls
3. Missed Calls
4. Scratch Pad
5. All
2. Phone Book
1. Find Name
2. Add New Entry
3. Speed Dial #’s
4. Voice Dial
5. Group List
6. Services
1. Account Info
2. Customer Care
3. Directory Assist
3. Messaging
1. Send message
1. Send Picture Mail
2. Send Video Mail
3. Send Text Message
4. Email
2. Picture Mail
1. Inbox
2. Erase
3. Text Msg.
1. Inbox
2. Outbox
3. Send message
4. Erase
4. Email
5. Voicemail
1. Call Voicemail
2. Details
3. Clear Icon
4. Web
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2E: NavigatingThrough Menus
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Downloads
Games
Ringers
Screen Savers
Applications
Others
6. Pictures/Video
1. Camera
2. Camcorder
3. My Pictures
1. In Camera
2. Downloaded/Assigned
4. My Video
1. In Camcorder
2. Downloaded/Saved
5. Online Albums
6. Account Info
7. Voicemail
1. Call Voicemail
2. Details
3. Clear Icon
8. Settings
1. Sounds
1. Volume
2. Ringer Type
3. Alerts
4. Key Tone Length
2. Display
1. Backlight
2. Greeting
3. Contrast (Sub)
4. Phonebook Match
5. Screen Saver
6. Idle Screen
7. Direction (Sub)
3. PCS Vision
1. Enable/Disable PCS Vision
2. Net Guard
3. Update Profile
4. Roaming
1. Set Mode
2. Call Guard
5. Location
1. Settings
6. Messaging
1. Display Pop-up
2. Save Sent Message
3. Default Callback #
4. Entry Mode
5. Signature
6. Display Font Size
7. Preset Messages
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2E: NavigatingThrough Menus
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Security
1. Lock Phone
2. Change Lock
3. Erase Phone Book
4. Erase Downloads
5. Reset Phone
6. Reset Pictures/Video
7. Special #s
8. Information
1. Phone Info
2. Legend of Icons
9. Others
1. Open to Answer
2. Any Key Answer
3. Auto Answer
4. Airplane Mode
5. Language
6. Speed Dial
7. Abbrev. Dial
8. TTY
0. Voice Guidance
1. Voice Guidance
2. Settings
9. Tools
1. Voice Memo
1. Record
2. Play
3. Erase All
2. Calculator
3. Scheduler
4. Alarm
1. Notice
2. Time
3. Ringer Volume
4. Ringer Type
5. Countdown Timer
1. Time
2. Ringer Volume
3. Ringer Type
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2E: NavigatingThrough Menus
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
My Menu
In addition to the main menu, your phone offers you a My Menu
function. You can customize My Menu, a group of shortcuts to the
phone's various tasks, for your efficient use of the phone.
To display My Menu:
Ⅵ
From standby mode, press the navigation key up ( ).
– or –
Ⅵ
From the main menu, select MyMenu (left softkey).
MyMenu'sView
My Menu appears in two ways: thumbnail view and list view.
To switch My Menu between the thumbnail view and list view, select
Options (right softkey) from the My Menu display, highlight Thumbnail
OK
View or ListView, and press
.
AddingaShortcuttoMyMenu
1. From standby mode, press the navigation key up ( ). (My
Menu displays.)
2. Highlight the empty menu item you want to assign a phone task
to and select Options (right softkey). (Menu options will
display).
OK
3. Highlight AssigntoMyMenu and press
. (A group of phone
task icons appears.)
4. Use your navigation key to scroll through phone tasks.
OK
5. Highlight your desired task and press
to save the setting.
(The new My Menu displays.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2E: NavigatingThrough Menus
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MyMenuOptionsinThumbnailView
From the thumbnail view of My Menu, select Options (right softkey)
to display menu options. To select an option, highlight it and press
OK
.
ᮣ
ListView to switch the My Menu screen into the list view.
ᮣ
AssigntoMyMenu to select a function from options for the menu
item.
ᮣ
EditTitle to edit the title of the menu item.
ᮣ
Erase to clear the menu item.
ᮣ
EraseAll to clear all the menu items in My Menu.
ᮣ
SetScreenSaver to select the background view from options (Off,
Pattern, Dwnld. ScreenSaver, InCamera, and Dwnld./Assigned).
ᮣ
SetButtonIcon to select an image for an individual box from
options (Off, Pattern, Dwnld. ScreenSaver, InCamera, and
Dwnld./Assigned).
ᮣ
TitleView to turn the menu titles on thumbnail view On or Off.
MyMenuOptionsinListView
From the list view of My Menu, select Options (right softkey) to display
OK
menu options. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
ThumbnailView to switch the My Menu screen into the thumbnail
view.
ᮣ
AssigntoMyMenu to select a function from options for the menu
item.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
EditTitle to edit the title of the menu item.
Erase to clear the menu item.
EraseAll to clear all the menu items in My Menu.
SetScreenSaver to select the background view from options (Off,
Pattern, Dwnld. ScreenSaver, InCamera, and Dwnld./Assigned).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2E: NavigatingThrough Menus
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2F
Managing Call History
In This Section
ᮣ
ViewingHistory
ᮣ
CallHistoryOptions
ᮣ
MakingaCallFromCallHistory
ᮣ
SavingaPhoneNumberFromCallHistory
ᮣ
ErasingCallHistory
he Call History keeps track of incoming calls, calls made from your
TPCS Phone, and missed calls. This section guides you through
accessing and making the most of your Call History.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2F: Managing Call History
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing History
You’ll find the Call History feature very helpful. It is a list of the last 20
phone numbers (or internal Phone Book entries) for calls you placed,
accepted, or missed. Call History makes redialing a number fast and
easy. It is continually updated as new numbers are added to the
beginning of the list and the oldest entries are removed from the
bottom of the list.
Each entry contains the phone number (if it is available) and internal
Phone Book entry name (if the phone number is in your internal
Phone Book). Duplicate calls (same number and type of call) may
only appear once on the list.
To view a Call History entry:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight CallHistory and press
.
3. Highlight OutgoingCalls, IncomingCalls, MissedCalls, or Scratch
OK
Pad and press
. (A list of calls will display.)
4. Use your navigation key to scroll through the list.
Call History Options
For additional information and options on a particular call, highlight
OK
a Call History entry and press
. This feature displays the time and
date of the call and, by using the right softkey (Options), gives you the
option of selecting:
ᮣ
Call to dial the phone number.
ᮣ
Save to save the phone number to your internal Phone Book.
ᮣ
Erase to erase the phone number.
ᮣ
PrependDial to add an area code before dialing. (See “Prepending
a Phone Number From Call History” on page 73.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2F: Managing Call History
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making a Call From Call History
To place a call from Call History:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight CallHistory and press
.
3. Highlight OutgoingCalls, IncomingCalls, MissedCalls, or Scratch
OK
Pad and press
. (A list of calls will display.)
4. Highlight the entry you want to call by scrolling through the list.
TALK
5. Press
to dial.
Note: You cannot make calls from Call History to entries identified as
No ID or Restricted.
Saving a Phone Number From Call History
Your PCS Phone can store up to 300 internal Phone Book entries.
A Phone Book entry can store up to five phone numbers.
To save a phone number from Call History:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight CallHistory and press
.
3. Highlight OutgoingCalls, IncomingCalls, MissedCalls, or Scratch
OK
Pad and press
. (A list of calls will display.)
4. Highlight the entry you want to save and select Options (right
softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Save and press
.
OK
6. Highlight NewEntry and press
.
7. Selectaniconfromtheoptions(
Home,
Work,
Mobile,
OK
andmore)andpress
.
OK
8. To enter a name, highlight the
icon, press
, enter the
OK
name, and press
.
9. Select Save (left softkey) to save the new entry.
Tip: You can also save numbers from Call History to existing Phone Book entries.
Just select Add to Contact in step 6 above, use your navigation key to select an
entry and a label icon, and select Save to save the new number.
Note: You cannot save phone numbers from calls identified as No ID or Restricted.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2F: Managing Call History
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Prepending a Phone Number From Call History
If you need to make a call from Call History and you happen to be
outside your local area code, you can add the appropriate prefix by
following these steps:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight CallHistory and press
.
3. Highlight OutgoingCalls, IncomingCalls, MissedCalls, or Scratch
OK
Pad and press
. (A list of calls will display.)
4. Highlight the entry you want to prepend.
5. Select Options (right softkey).
OK
6. Highlight PrependDial and press
.
7. Enter the digits you want to add to the number. (The change
only applies to the current call.)
TALK
8. Press
to dial.
Erasing Call History
To erase Call History lists:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight CallHistory and press
3. Highlight EraseHistory and press
.
OK
.
4. Highlight the category you want to erase (OutgoingCalls,
IncomingCalls, MissedCalls, ScratchPad, or All) and press
(You will be prompted to confirm.)
OK
.
OK
5. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Tip: To erase individual Call History entries, see “Call History Options” on page 71.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2F: Managing Call History
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2G
Using the Internal Phone Book
In This Section
ᮣ
InternalPhoneBookEntryOptions
ᮣ
AddingaNewInternalPhoneBookEntry
ᮣ
FindingInternalPhoneBookEntries
ᮣ
SelectingaRingerType
ᮣ
DialingPCSServices
ow you know the basics that make it easier to stay in touch with
Npeople and information. This section helps you make the most of
your contacts and time when you are trying to connect with the
important people in your life.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Internal Phone Book Entry Options
Your PCS Phone can store up to 300 internal Phone Book entries.
Phone book entries can store up to five phone numbers, three email
addresses, and one Web address (URL) per entry. In addition, various
options are available for your convenience.
To access an internal Phone Book entry’s options:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight an entry and press
. (The Details screen
appears.)
3. Highlight the phone number, email address, or Web address you
wish to view and select Options (right softkey) to display the
entry’s options.
OK
4. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
Call to dial the phone number.
ⅷ
SetSpeedDial to add the phone number to the Speed Dial list
(see page 87).
ⅷ
ⅷ
SetVoiceDial to add a Voice Dial tag to the phone number
(see page 102).
PrependDial to dial by adding digits to the phone number
(see page 86).
ⅷ
ⅷ
GotoURL togototheWebsite(onlyappearsinWebaddresses).
SendTextMsg. togotothemessagingfeaturetosendamessage
(onlyappearsinphonenumbersandemailaddresses).
Tip: Additional options are available when you are in the Edit screen. See “Edit
Entry Options” on page 80.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a New Internal Phone Book Entry
Your PCS Phone can store up to 300 internal Phone Book entries.
Phone book entries can store up to five phone numbers, three email
addresses, and one Web address (URL) per entry.
To add a new entry:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight AddNewEntry and press
. (The Add New Entry
screen appears.)
OK
4. To enter a name, highlight
the name (up to 36 characters) and press
<Name> and press
. Enter
OK
.
5. To enter a phone number, highlight
<Number> and press
OK
OK
. Enter the phone number (up to 32 digits) and press
.
Selectaniconfromtheoptions(
Home,
Work,
Mobile,
OK
andmore)andpress
.
OK
6. To enter an email address, highlight
Enter the email address (up to 48 characters) and press
<E-mail> and press
.
OK
.
.
OK
OK
7. To enter a Web address, highlight <URL> and press
Enter the Web address (up to 48 characters) and press
8. Select Save (left softkey) to save the new entry.
– or –
.
OK
1. From standby mode, enter a phone number and press
.
OK
2. Highlight NewEntry and press
.
3. Selectaniconfromtheoptions(
Home,
Work,
Mobile,
OK
andmore)andpress
.
OK
4. To enter a name, highlight
<Name> and press
. Enter
OK
the name and press
.
5. Select Save (left softkey) to save the new entry.
Note: Make sure that mobile phone numbers are always labeled with the mobile
icon so they can be used for Messaging. From the Messaging menu, you can
only select phone numbers labeled with the mobile
icon and email addresses.
Tip: When the Add New Entry screen appears, you can assign a picture to the entry
so the picture will display for incoming calls from the specific caller (see page 81).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Finding Internal Phone Book Entries
There are several ways to display your internal Phone Book entries.
Follow the steps outlined in the sections below to display entries
from the internal Phone Book menu.
FindingNames
You can review all the entries stored in your internal Phone Book or
find an entry quickly by following these simple steps:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight FindName and press
. (Your internal Phone Book
list appears.)
Shortcut: From standby mode, press the navigation key right ( ) to display
your internal Phone Book list.
4. Press the navigation key left or right to scroll through pages or
enter the first letters of a name to find the entry.
OK
5. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen
appears.)
TALK
6. To dial a phone number, highlight it and press
.
FindingSpeedDialNumbers
To find phone numbers you have stored in speed dial locations:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight SpeedDial#’s and press
. (The Speed Dial list
appears.)
4. Press the navigation key left or right to scroll through pages or
enter the location number (2-99) to find the entry.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
FindingVoiceDialNumbers
To find phone numbers you have stored in Voice Dial:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight VoiceDial and press
. (The Voice Dial List
appears.)
4. Press the navigation key left or right to scroll through pages to
find the entry.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding a Phone Number or Address to an Internal
Phone Book Entry
To add a phone number, email address, or Web address to an entry:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
2. Highlight the entry you wish to add a number or address to and
OK
press
. (The Details screen appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey). (The Edit screen appears.)
4. Enter the new phone number, email address, or URL.
ⅷ
To enter a phone number, highlight an empty item with the
OK
icon and press
. Enter the phone number and
OK
press
. Select an icon from the options (
Home,
.
OK
Work,
Mobile, and more) and press
ⅷ
ⅷ
To enter an email address, highlight an empty item with the
OK
icon and press
.
. Enter the email address and press
OK
To enter a Web address, highlight an empty item with the
OK
icon and press
.
. Enter the Web address and press
OK
5. Select Save (left softkey) to save the changed entry.
– or –
OK
1. From standby mode, enter a phone number and press
.
OK
2. Highlight AddtoContact and press
. (Your internal Phone
Book list appears.)
OK
3. Highlight the entry you wish to add the number to and press
.
4. Selectaniconfromtheoptions(
Home,
Work,
Mobile,
OK
andmore)andpress
.
5. Select Save (left softkey) to save the changed entry.
Note: Make sure that mobile phone numbers are always labeled with the mobile
icon so they can be used for Messaging. From the Messaging menu, you can
only select phone numbers labeled with the mobile
icon and email addresses.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Editing an Internal Phone Book Entry
To make changes to an entry:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry you wish to edit and press
. (The
Details screen appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey). (The Edit screen appears.)
4. Highlight the name, phone number, email address, or Web
OK
address you wish to edit and press
.
5. Enter a new name, phone number, email address, or Web
OK
BACK
address and press
. (Press
to erase a digit or letter;
BACK
press and hold
to erase all digits or letters.)
6. Select Save (left softkey) to save the changed entry.
Tip: When the Edit screen appears, you can assign a picture to the entry so the
picture will display for incoming calls from the specific caller (see page 81).
EditEntryOptions
When the Edit screen displays, the following options are available by
selecting Options (right softkey). To select an option, highlight it and
OK
press
.
ᮣ
Icon to select an icon for the phone number (see page 84).
ᮣ
Ringer to select a ringer type for the phone number and email
address (see page 82).
ᮣ
ᮣ
SpeedDial to add the phone number to the Speed Dial list.
Secret to make a phone number, email address, and Web address
secret (see page 83).
ᮣ
ᮣ
Replace to change the order of phone numbers and email
addresses in an entry (see page 84).
Erase to erase an item (see page 85).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assigning a Picture to an Entry
You can assign a picture to an internal Phone Book entry so the
picture will display for incoming calls from the specific caller.
To select a picture for an entry:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen
appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey). (The Edit screen appears.)
OK
4. Highlight the
icon and press
.
5. Highlight Dwnld. ScreenSaver, InCamera, or Dwnld. /Assigned
OK
and press
. (Thumbnail pictures will display.)
ⅷ
Dwnld. ScreenSaver includes Screen Savers downloaded
with the Downloads menu.
ⅷ
ⅷ
InCamera includes the pictures saved in your camera.
Dwnld. /Assigned includes the pictures downloaded to My
Pictures.
6. Using your navigation key, highlight the desired picture.
7. Select Select (left softkey). (The selected picture will display.)
OK
8. Press
. (You will return to the Edit screen.)
9. Select Save (left softkey) to save the entry.
To cancel the picture assignment from an entry:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey). (The Edit screen appears.)
4. Highlight the
icon and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Remove and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
6. Highlight Yes and press
.
7. Select Save (left softkey) to save the changed entry.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting a Ringer Type for a Phone Number
You can assign a ringer type to a phone number in an internal Phone
Book entry so you can identify the caller by the ringer type.
To select a ringer type for a phone number:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen
appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey). (The Edit screen appears.)
4. Highlight the phone number and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Ringer and press
.
OK
6. Highlight one of the categories listed below and press
.
ⅷ
Pattern1 includes 9 ringer tones.
ⅷ
Pattern2 includes 9 alarm tones.
ⅷ
Melody includes 9 melodies.
ⅷ
Downloads includes the ringers you have downloaded (see
page 181).
ⅷ
ⅷ
VoiceMemo includes the voice memos you have recorded
with the Voice Memo feature (see page 105).
Common clears a specific ringer type.
OK
7. Highlight your desired ringer type and press
. (The Edit
screen appears. A new ringer icon displays at the bottom of the
screen when the number is highlighted.)
8. Select Save (left softkey) to save the new ringer type.
Tip: Ringer types may also be assigned to email addresses.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Secret Phone Numbers
You can hide an entry’s phone numbers by making them secret. The
entry name is still displayed, but the entry’s phone numbers are
replaced by “Secret”. A secret number requires your lock code each
time you access it.
To make a phone number secret:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey). (The Edit screen appears.)
4. Highlight the phone number and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Secret and press
.
OK
6. Highlight On and press
. (The Edit screen appears. The
icon displays at the bottom of the screen when the secret
number is highlighted.)
7. Select Save (left softkey) to save the entry.
Tip: You may also make an entry’s email addresses and Web address (URL)
secret.
To make a phone number public:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey).
4. Enter your lock code. (The Edit screen appears.)
5. Highlight the secret number and select Options (right softkey).
OK
6. Highlight Secret and press
.
OK
7. Highlight Off and press
.
8. Select Save (left softkey) to save the new setting.
Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of either your
Social Security number or PCS Phone Number or try 0000. If none of these work,
call PCS Customer Solutions at 1-888-211-4PCS (4727).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changing an Icon for a Phone Number
To change an icon for a phone number:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen
appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey). (The Edit screen appears.)
4. Highlight the phone number and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Icon and press
.
6. Select your desired icon from options (
Home,
Work,
OK
Mobile, and more) and press
.
7. Select Save (left softkey) to save the icon.
Note: Make sure that mobile phone numbers are always labeled with the mobile
icon so they can be used for Messaging. From the Messaging menu, you can
only select phone numbers labeled with the mobile
icon and email addresses.
Changing the Order of Phone Numbers
You can interchange any two phone numbers in the same entry.
To change the order of phone numbers:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen
appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey). (The Edit screen appears.)
4. Highlight the phone number you wish to change the order and
select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Replace and press
.
OK
6. Highlight another phone number and press
. (The two
phone numbers will be interchanged.)
7. Select Save (left softkey) to save the changed entry.
Tip: You may change the order of email addresses in the same entry.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing Phone Numbers
To erase an individual phone number, email address, or Web address
(URL):
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen
appears.)
3. Select Edit (left softkey). (The Edit screen appears.)
4. Highlight the item you wish to erase and select Options (right
softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Erase and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
6. Highlight Yes and press
to erase the item.
7. Select Save (left softkey) to save the changed entry.
Erasing Internal Phone Book Entries
To erase an internal Phone Book entry:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
2. Highlight the entry and select Options (right softkey).
OK
3. Highlight Erase and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
4. Highlight Yes and press
to erase the entry.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dialing PCS Services
You must be in digital mode to access PCS Services.
To dial a service:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Services and press
.
4. Highlight AccountInfo, CustomerCare, or DirectoryAssist and
TALK
press
.
Phone Book Match Dialing
You can make a call by entering the last several digits of a phone
number when this feature is activated. (See “Setting Phone Book
Match Dialing” on page 49.)
To make a call with Phone Book Match Dialing enabled:
1. From standby mode, enter the last 3-6 digits of a phone number.
TALK
2. Press
. (The matching internal Phone Book entries will
display.)
3. Highlight the name or phone number you wish to dial and
TALK
press
.
Prepending a Phone Number
From the Internal Phone Book
This feature allows you to make a call by adding digits to a phone
number saved in your internal Phone Book. If phone numbers have
been saved without an area code and you are outside your local area
code, you can make a call by following these steps:
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen appears.)
3. Highlight the phone number and select Options (right softkey).
OK
4. Highlight PrependDial and press
.
5. Enter the digits you want to add to the number. (The change
only applies to the current call.)
TALK
6. Press
to dial.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Dialing
With this feature activated, you can dial Speed Dial entries using one
key press for locations 2-9 or two key presses for locations 10-99. The
Speed Dial locations are assigned to individual phone numbers in
your internal Phone Book entries. (See “Setting Speed Dialing” on
page 48.)
AssigningaSpeedDialLocation
To assign the speed dial location to a phone number:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight SpeedDial#’s and press
. (Your Speed Dial list
appears.)
4. Highlight <Empty> by using the navigation key (or enter a
location number 2 to 99) and select Select (left softkey). (Your
internal Phone Book list appears. This list only includes entries
with phone numbers that are not yet assigned for the speed dial.)
5. Highlight your desired internal Phone Book entry and
OK
press
.
6. Highlight the phone number you wish to add to the Speed Dial
list and select Save (left softkey) to save. (The new Speed Dial
list appears.)
– or –
1. Press the navigation key right ( ) from standby mode. (Your
internal Phone Book list appears.)
OK
2. Highlight your desired entry and press
. (The Details
screen appears.)
3. Highlight the phone number you wish to add to the Speed Dial
list and select Options (right softkey).
OK
4. Highlight SetSpeedDial and press
. (Your Speed Dial list
appears.)
5. Highlight <Empty> by using the navigation key (or enter a
OK
location number 2 to 99) and press
to save.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UsingSpeedDial2-9
To use one-touch speed dialing:
Ⅵ
From standby mode, press and hold the appropriate key for
approximately one second.
UsingSpeedDial10-99
To use two-touch speed dialing:
1. From standby mode, press the first digit key.
2. Press and hold the second digit key for approximately one second.
ChangingSpeedDialLocations
To change the speed dial location for a phone number:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight SpeedDial#’s and press
.
4. Highlight the speed dial entry that you wish to move and select
Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Move and press
.
OK
6. Highlight <Empty> from the Speed Dial list and press
.
Note: You can only move speed dial entries to unused speed dial locations.
ClearingaSpeedDialEntry
To clear a speed dial entry from your Speed Dial list:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight SpeedDial#’s and press
.
4. Highlight the speed dial entry that you wish to clear and select
Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Remove and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
6. Highlight Yes and press
. (The speed dial entry will be
cleared, but the phone number will still remain in your internal
Phone Book.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Group List
You can save up to 10 mobile phone numbers or email addresses with
name in your Group List. This helps you send text/picture messages
to multiple addresses at a time.
AddinganEntrytoYourGroupList
To add an entry to the group list:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight GroupList and press
.
4. Highlight <Empty> and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Edit and press
.
6. Enter a name and address.
OK
ⅷ
Highlight EnterName and press
. Enter the name and
OK
press
.
OK
ⅷ
Highlight EnterAddress and press
. Enter the mobile
OK
phone number or email address and press
.
7. Select Save (left softkey). (You will be prompted to confirm.)
OK
8. Highlight Yes and press
to save.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CopyinganEntryFromtheInternalPhoneBook
To copy a mobile phone number or email address from the internal
Phone Book entries to the group list:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight GroupList and press
.
4. Highlight <Empty> and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight GetPhoneBook and press
. (Your internal Phone
Book list appears.)
OK
6. Highlight the entry and press
. (The Details screen appears.)
7. Highlight the mobile phone number or email address that you
OK
wish to copy to the group list and press
.
8. Select Save (left softkey). (You will be prompted to confirm.)
OK
9. Highlight Yes and press
.
Note: The group list is saved in a separate memory location from your internal
Phone Book. Changes in your internal Phone Book are not reflected on your
group list.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EditinganEntryinYourGroupList
To edit a name, mobile phone number, or email address in the group
list:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight GroupList and press
.
4. Highlight an entry to edit and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Edit and press
.
6. Edit a name, mobile phone number, or email address.
OK
ⅷ
To edit a name, highlight the name and press
. Enter a
OK
new name and press
.
ⅷ
To edit a mobile phone number or email address, highlight
OK
it and press
. Enter a new mobile phone number or
OK
email address and press
.
7. Select Save (left softkey). (You will be prompted to confirm.)
OK
8. Highlight Yes and press
to save.
ErasinganEntryFromYourGroupList
To erase an entry from the group list:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight GroupList and press
.
4. Highlight an entry and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Erase and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
6. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2G: Using the Internal Phone Book
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2H
Personal Organizer
In This Section
ᮣ
AddinganEventtotheScheduler
ᮣ
EventAlerts
ᮣ
ViewingEvents
ᮣ
UsingtheAlarmClock
ᮣ
UsingYourPhone’sTools
our PCS Phone is equipped with several personal information
Ymanagement features that help you manage your busy lifestyle.
These features turn your phone into a time management planner that
helps you keep up with your contacts, schedules, and commitments. It
takes productivity to a whole new level.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2H: Personal Organizer
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding an Event to the Scheduler
Your Scheduler helps organize your time and reminds you of up to 30
important events.
To add an event:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Scheduler and press
. (The current month's
calendar displays.)
4. To display another month, select Month (left softkey), change
OK
the month/year using the navigation key, and press
.
5. Highlight the day you want to add an event to using the
OK
navigation key and press
.
6. Select Options (right softkey) to display menu options.
OK
7. Highlight NewEvent and press
. (The Edit Schedule screen
appears.)
OK
8. Highlight From and press
. Enter the time to begin and
OK
press
.
OK
9. Highlight To and press
. Enter the time to finish and press
OK
.
OK
10. Highlight Description and press
. Enter the text and press
OK
.
11. To set the event alarm options, highlight AlarmSet and press
OK
. (See “Event Alarm Options” on page 94.) Saving the
options will return to this menu item.
OK
12. To repeat the event alarm, highlight Repeat and press
.
Select an option (None, Daily, Weekly, Monthly or Yearly), and
OK
press
.
13. Select Save (left softkey) to save the new event.
Tip: When an event alarm is set, the icon
the scheduled date.
will appear in the standby mode on
Tip:PressthenavigationkeyupordowntoscrollbyweekthroughtheScheduler
calendar.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2H: Personal Organizer
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Alarm Options
When the Alarm Set screen appears with the following scheduler
OK
alarm options, select the desired option then press
option settings, select Save (left softkey). This will return to the
original menu item on the Edit Schedule screen.
. To save the
ᮣ
AlarmSet: Activates or deactivates the event alarm. Highlight On
OK
or Off and press
.
ᮣ
ᮣ
AlarmTime: Shifts the alarm in advance for a scheduled event.
Select an option (5Min. Before, 30Min. Before, 1Hr. Before, or On
OK
Time) then press
.
RingerType: Selects a ringer type for the alarm (Pattern1, Pattern2,
Melody, Downloads, or VoiceMemo).
ᮣ
ᮣ
RingerVolume: Adjusts the alarm volume (Level 1 to 5, or Off).
AnimationType: Selects animation for the alarm from Preloaded
(Work, Dinner, Leisure, Business, Meeting or Anniversary),
Dwnld. ScreenSaver, InCamera, or Dwnld./Assigned. (When the
OK
image list is displayed, you can view the image by pressing
.
To view the next image, press the navigation key right. To return
BACK
to the image list, press
.)
Event Alerts
When your phone is turned on and you have an event alarm
scheduled, your phone alerts you and displays the event summary.
There are several ways your PCS Phone alerts you of scheduled events:
ᮣ
By playing the assigned ringer type.
ᮣ
By illuminating the backlight.
ᮣ
By flashing the LED red.
OK
To silence the alarm and reset the schedule, press
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2H: Personal Organizer
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Events
To view your scheduled events on a specific day:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Scheduler and press
. (The current month’s
calendar displays.)
4. To display another month, select Month (left softkey), change
OK
the month/year using your navigation key, and press
.
OK
5. Highlight a day you want to view and press
. (The
scheduled events will display.)
Tip: A day marked blue has scheduled events. When you highlight the day, the
number of events on the day will display at the upper right corner of the screen.
Note: A repeating event is only displayed on the first scheduled date. Once the
event alarm is notified on the first scheduled date, then the event will be
displayed on the next scheduled date.
To view all the scheduled events:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Scheduler and press
4. Select Options (right softkey).
.
OK
5. Highlight AllEvents and press
. (A chronological list of all
events will display.)
Erasing a Day’s Events
To erase a scheduled day’s events:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Scheduler and press
.
4. Select the day and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight EraseDay and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
6. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2H: Personal Organizer
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Purging Events
To delete events scheduled before a specific time and date:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Scheduler and press
.
4. Select the day and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight EraseBefore and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
6. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Purging All Events
To delete all scheduled events:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Scheduler and press
.
4. Select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight EraseAll and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
6. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2H: Personal Organizer
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Alarm Clock
Your phone comes with a built-in alarm clock function.
To set the alarm clock:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Alarm and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Notice and press
and press
. To set the alarm, highlight On
OK
OK
. (To deactivate, highlight Off and press
.)
OK
5. Highlight Time and press
. Enter the alarm time and press
OK
1
2
. (Press
for a.m. or
for p.m.)
OK
6. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
Notice sets the alarm on or off.
ⅷ
Time sets the time of alarm.
ⅷ
RingerVolume adjusts the alarm volume (Level 1 to 5, or Off).
ⅷ
RingerType selects a ringer type for the alarm. See “Ringer
Types” on page 31.
END
7. To exit, press
. (The
icon will appear.)
When your phone is turned on and you have set the alarm, the clock
will sound an alarm with animation at the specified time. This will
repeat every day until you deactivate it. (If you are on a call, the alarm
will sound after the call.)
To turn off the alarm when ringing:
OK
END
Ⅵ
Press
or
.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2H: Personal Organizer
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Countdown Timer
Your phone comes with a built-in countdown timer function.
To set the countdown timer:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight CountdownTimer and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Time, press
and press
, enter the duration (1 to 99 minutes),
OK
. (The timer will start.)
OK
5. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
Time sets the duration.
ⅷ
RingerVolume adjusts the alarm volume (Level 1 to 5, or Off).
ⅷ
RingerType selects a ringer type for the alarm. See “Ringer
Types” on page 31.
END
6. To exit, press
. (The
icon will appear.)
To cancel the countdown timer after it has started:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight CountdownTimer and press
.
4. Select Stop (right softkey) to cancel.
When the timer expires, the phone will sound an alarm with
animation. (If you are on a call, the alarm will sound after the call.)
To turn off the alarm when ringing:
OK
END
Ⅵ
Press
or
.
Note: Turning the phone off cancels the countdown timer.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2H: Personal Organizer
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Your Phone’s Tools
In addition to features designed to help make you more efficient
and organized, your new PCS Phone also offers tools for your
entertainment and amusement.
Using the Calculator
Your phone comes with a built-in calculator function.
To use the calculator:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Calculator and press
.
4. Enter a number using your keypad. To insert a decimal point,
BACK
press the left softkey. To clear the number, press
.
5. Press the appropriate navigation key for an arithmetic option.
ꢁ
ꢂ
ꢀ
ᮣ
( for addition, for subtraction, for multiplication, or for
division)
OK
6. Enter another number and press
to display the result.
END
7. To close the calculator and return to standby mode, press
.
Here are a few pointers for using the calculator:
Ⅵ
To change the displayed number from positive (+) to negative (-)
and vice versa, press
.
Ⅵ
Ⅵ
To use the Tip Calculation function, enter an amount and press
the right softkey button. The calculated tip is displayed. Press
the right softkey button again to display the total amount
including the tip.
To change the tip calculation percentage, press
, enter a
OK
new rate, and press
.
Tip: Numbers can be input and displayed with up to eight figures, excluding
decimal points.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2H: Personal Organizer
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2I
Using Your Phone’s
Voice Services
In This Section
ᮣ
UsingVoice-ActivatedDialing
ᮣ
VoiceMemos
his section explains the features associated with your phone’s
TVoice Services. The easy-to-follow instructions explain how
to use voice-activated dialing and how to record and manage
voice memos.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2I: UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Voice-Activated Dialing
SM
In addition to PCS Voice Command (see page 195), you can use a
Voice Dial tag to automatically dial a phone number in your internal
Phone Book. Your phone can store up to 100 Voice Dial tags. (To
create a Voice Dial tag, see “Recording a Voice Dial Tag to Your
Phone” on page 102.)
To use a Voice Dial tag to call a phone number:
TALK
1. Press and hold
from standby mode.
2. Follow the voice prompts and recite the entry’s Voice Dial tag
into your phone’s microphone. (The number will be dialed
automatically.)
Note: Record Voice Dial tags in a quiet environment and without the aid of an
accessory (for example, a headset).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2I: UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording a Voice Dial Tag to Your Phone
You can set up a voice dial tag for your internal Phone Book entry’s
phone number in the following two ways.
To record a voice dial tag and select the phone number:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
3. Highlight VoiceDial and press
4. Select New (left softkey).
.
OK
.
5. After you hear the voice prompt “Name please”, say the name
you wish to record. (The phone will replay the recording.)
6. After you hear the voice prompt “Again”, say the name again.
(The phone will replay the recording and you will hear the
confirmation, “Entry completed”.)
OK
7. Highlight FindName and press
. (Your internal Phone Book
list appears.)
OK
8. Highlight the desired entry and press
.
9. Highlight the phone number to which you wish to add the voice
dial tag and select Save (left softkey). (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
10. Highlight Yes and press
to save the voice dial tag.
To select the phone number and record a voice dial tag:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight FindName and press
. (Your internal Phone Book
list appears.)
OK
4. Highlight the desired entry and press
.
5. Highlight the phone number to which you wish to add the voice
dial tag and select Options (right softkey).
OK
6. Highlight SetVoiceDial and press
.
7. Follow steps 5 and 6 in “To record a voice dial tag and select the
phone number” above.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2I: UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PlayingaVoiceDialTag
To play a voice dial tag:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
3. Highlight VoiceDial and press
.
OK
.
4. Highlight an entry and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Play and press
(the recorded voice dial tag is
played).
ChangingtheVoiceDialTag
To change the voice dial tag:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
3. Highlight VoiceDial and press
.
OK
.
4. Highlight an entry and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Edit and press
.
6. Follow the voice prompts to record the voice dial tag.
ErasingaVoiceDialTag
To erase a voice dial tag from a phone number:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
.
OK
3. Highlight VoiceDial and press
.
4. Highlight an entry and select Options (right softkey).
OK
5. Highlight Erase and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
6. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2I: UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing All Voice Dial Tags
To erase all voice dial tags:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight PhoneBook and press
3. Highlight VoiceDial and press
4. Select Options (right softkey).
.
OK
.
OK
5. Highlight EraseAll and press
. (You will be prompted to
enter your lock code.)
6. Enter your lock code. (You will be prompted to confirm.)
OK
7. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2I: UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording Voice Memos
To record a voice memo in standby mode:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight VoiceMemo and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Record and press
. (The Record screen appears.)
Shortcut: From standby mode, press and hold VoiceMemo (left softkey) to
display the Record screen.
OK
5. Select Start (left softkey) or press
6. Start recording after the beep.
To end the recording of your memo:
.
OK
Ⅵ
Select Done (left softkey) or press
.
To record the other party’s voice during a phone call in digital mode:
1. Press and hold VoiceMemo (left softkey).
OK
2. Select Start (left softkey) or press
.
3. Start recording after the beep.
To end the recording of the other party’s voice:
OK
Ⅵ
Select Done (left softkey) or press
.
Note: Your phone can store 15 memos of 15 seconds each.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2I: UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing Voice Memos
To play the voice memo you have recorded:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight VoiceMemo and press
. (The Voice Memo menu
displays.)
Shortcut: From standby mode, select VoiceMemo (left softkey) to display the
Voice Memo menu.
OK
4. Highlight Play and press
. (The voice memo list appears.)
OK
5. Highlight a voice memo you wish to play and press
.
OK
6. Select Start (left softkey) or press
to start playing. (To adjust
volume, press the volume keys on the side of your phone.)
To end playing:
OK
Ⅵ
Select Cancel (left softkey) or press
.
Voice Memo Options
When the voice memo list displays, following options are available by
selecting Options (right softkey). To select an option, highlight it and
OK
press
.
ᮣ
Detail to display the date and time.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
Rename to rename the voice memo’s caption. (See “Renaming a
Voice Memo’s Caption” on page 107.)
AssignRinger to assign the voice memo’s sound to the ringer tasks.
(See “Assigning a Voice Memo to Ringer Tasks” on page 107.)
Erase to erase the voice memo. (See “Erasing a Voice Memo” on
page 108.)
EraseAll to erase all the voice memos.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2I: UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RenamingaVoiceMemo’sCaption
To rename a voice memo’s caption:
1. From standby mode, select VoiceMemo (left softkey).
OK
2. Highlight Play and press
.
3. Highlight the voice memo and select Options (right softkey).
OK
4. Highlight Rename and press
.
OK
5. Edit the voice memo’s caption and press
.
AssigningaVoiceMemotoRingerTasks
To assign a voice memo’s sound recorded in standby mode to the
ringer tasks:
1. From standby mode, select VoiceMemo (left softkey).
OK
2. Highlight Play and press
. (The voice memo list appears.)
3. Highlight the desired voice memo and select Options (right
softkey).
OK
4. Highlight AssignRinger and press
to display options. (If
you select a voice memo recorded during a call, your phone
returns to the voice memo list so you may select another one.)
OK
5. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
VoiceCalls to assign the voice memo to the voice call ringer.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Voicemail to assign the voice memo to the voicemail alert.
TextMsg/Pic. Mail to assign the voice memo to the
text/picture message alert.
ⅷ
ⅷ
PhoneBook to assign the voice memo to an internal Phone
Book entry’s phone number or email address.
Time to assign the voice memo to Alarm, Countdown, or
Scheduler.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2I: UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ErasingaVoiceMemo
To erase a voice memo:
1. From standby mode, select VoiceMemo (left softkey).
OK
2. Highlight Play and press
.
3. Highlight the voice memo and select Options (right softkey).
OK
4. Highlight Erase and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
5. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Erasing All Voice Memos
To erase all voice memos:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Tools and press
.
OK
3. Highlight VoiceMemo and press
.
Shortcut: From standby mode, select VoiceMemo (left softkey).
OK
4. Highlight EraseAll and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
5. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2I: UsingYour Phone’s Voice Services
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2J
Using Your Phone’s Camera
With Camcorder
In This Section
ᮣ
TakingPictures
ᮣ
TakingVideos
SM
ᮣ
SharingPictureMail
ᮣ
StoringPictures
ᮣ
StoringVideos
SM
ᮣ
ManagingPictureMail
our PCS Phone gives you the ability to take full-color digital pictures
Yand videos, view your pictures and videos using the phone’s display,
and instantly share them with your family and friends. It’s fun and as
easy to use as a traditional point-and-click camera – just take a picture,
view it on your phone’s display, and send it to up to ten people, right
from your phone. Your pictures and videos may also be uploaded to a
SM
Picture Mail Website for storage or sent to another Website for your
personal use. Picture quality is similar to what you see on your
computer screen.
This section explains the features and options of your phone’s
built-in PCS Vision Camera/Camcorder.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taking Pictures
Taking pictures with your phone’s built-in PCS Camera is as simple as
choosing a subject, pointing the lens, and pressing a button. You can
activate Camera mode and take pictures whether the phone is open
or closed.
To take a picture with the phone open:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight Camera and press
to activate Camera mode. The
LED blinks red. (Additionaloptionsareavailablethroughthe
camera’sOptionsmenu. See“CameraModeOptions” onpage113for
moreinformation.)
Shortcut: To activate Camera mode, you can also press
twice, or press and
hold , or just press the Side Camera button (see illustration on page 8).
4. Using the phone’s main LCD as a viewfinder, aim the camera
lens at your subject.
OK
5. Hold the camera steady. To take the picture, press
,
,
or the Side Camera button. (The picture will automatically be
saved and displayed on the screen.)
6. Select Next (right softkey) to display the following options:
ⅷ
SendPicture to send the picture to your recipients (see
“Sharing Picture Mail” on page 118).
ⅷ
GotoCamera to return to Camera mode to take another
picture.
ⅷ
Upload to upload the picture to the Web.
ⅷ
Erase to erase the picture.
ⅷ
GotoMyPicture to view your pictures saved in the camera.
ⅷ
Assign to assign the picture to the phone tasks.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To take a picture with the phone closed:
1. Press and hold the Side Camera button to activate Camera mode.
2. Point the camera lens at your subject. You can check the picture
framing through the sub display screen.
3. Press the Side Camera button to take the picture.
Note: Your phone can save up to 30 pictures/videos in the camera/camcorder
(for example, 20 pictures and 10 videos) regardless of your settings and usage.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SM
Creating Your Picture Mail Password
The first time you use any of the Picture Mail management options
involving the Picture Mail Website you will need to establish a
Picture Mail password through your PCS Phone. This password
will also allow you to log in to the Picture Mail Website at
picturemail.sprintpcs.com to access and manage your uploaded
pictures and albums.
To create your Picture Mail password:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyPictures and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamera and press
.
OK
5. Select Options(right softkey), highlight Upload, and press
.
(You will be prompted to enter a password for your account.)
OK
6 Select OK (left softkey) or press
to display the Password
screen.
7. Enter a four- to eight-digit, alpha-numeric password and
OK
press
.
OK
8. Select Save (left softkey) or press
. (You will be prompted
to confirm your password.)
Tip: Write down your Picture Mail password in a secure place.
9. Please wait while the system creates your account.
Once you have received confirmation that your account has been
successfully registered, you may upload and share pictures and
access the Picture Mail Website.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camera Mode Options
When the phone is open and in Camera mode, several options are
available.
ᮣ
To select a zoom option (1x or 2x), press the navigation key up or
down or press the volume keys on the side of your phone. (The
zoom function is only available in Medium resolution.)
ᮣ
To select the desired brightness, press the navigation key right
(increase) or left (decrease).
ᮣ
To switch to Camcorder mode, press and hold
.
To display additional options, select Options (right softkey):
ᮣ
Flash: Select Off, OnThisShot, or AlwaysOn.
ᮣ
Self-timer: Activate the camera’s timer function. See “Setting the
Self-timer” on page 115 for details.
ᮣ
FunFrames: Select your favorite fun picture frame to decorate
your picture. The fun frame function is only available in Medium
resolution. (Once you have taken a picture, the fun frame cannot
be removed from the picture.)
ᮣ
Zoom: Select 1X or 2X. (The zoom function is only available in
Medium resolution.)
ᮣ
Brightness: Press the navigation key right (increase) or left
OK
(decrease) to select a setting and press
to apply the desired
setting.
ᮣ
PictureEffects: Select Off, Black&White, Sepia, Watermark, or
Glitter. The Watermark and Glitter are only available in Medium
resolution. (Once you have taken a picture, the picture effect
cannot be removed from the picture.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ᮣ
CameraSettings: These settings will remain unchanged, even you
turn the phone on/off.
ⅷ
ShutterSound: Select ShutterSound, ClickSound, Beep, Say
Cheeze!, or Silent. (The shutter does not sound if your
phone’s Ringer Volume is set to Vib, Off, or SilenceAll.)
ⅷ
Resolution: Select High (480x640) or Medium (240x320).
ⅷ
Quality: Select the picture quality Normal or Fine.
ⅷ
DateStamp: Select On or Off. (The date stamp is only
available in Medium resolution.)
ⅷ
MemoryGauge: Select Show or Hide.
ⅷ
FinderScope: Select Show or Hide.
ᮣ
GotoCamcorder: Switch to Camcorder mode to take videos.
Note: After taking a picture, the Self-timer, Fun Frames, and Picture Effects
settings return to Off.
Note: Exiting Camera mode resets Flash, Zoom, and Brightness to their default
settings.
Brightness adjustment
Resolution icon*
Number of stored pictures/videos
Count of
pictures/videos
you can take
Camera mode icon
Memory gauge
Brightness icon
Zoom icon*
Fine/Normal icon
Flash icon
Self-timer icon
Zoom adjustment*
CameraModeDisplay
Resolution, Zoom, and Zoom adjustment icons are only available in
Medium resolution.
*
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SettingtheSelf-timer
To activate the Self-timer and get yourself in on the picture or video:
1. With the phone open and in Camera mode, select Options
(right softkey).
OK
2. Highlight Self-timer and press
.
3. Highlight one of the timer options (2Sec., 5Sec., or 10Sec.) and
OK
press
press
. To deactivate the Self-timer, highlight Off and
.
OK
OK
4. Press
when you are ready to start the timer. The phone
beeps every second. The LED blinks green and turns red for the
last few seconds.
5. When the self-timer expires, the phone takes a picture or starts
recording a video automatically.
To cancel the Self-timer after it has started:
Ⅵ
Select Cancel (right softkey).
Note: While the Self-timer is active, all keys are disabled except Back, End, and
the right softkey (Cancel).
Note: After taking a picture or video, the Self-timer setting returns to Off.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taking Videos
Taking videos with your phone’s built-in PCS Camcorder is as simple
as choosing a subject, pointing the lens, and pressing a button.
To take a video:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight Camcorder and press
to activate Camcorder
mode. The LED blinks red. (Additional options are available
through the camcorder’s Options menu. See “Camcorder Mode
Options” on page 117 for more information.)
Shortcut: From Camera mode, press and hold
to switch to Camcorder mode.
4. Using the phone’s main LCD as a viewfinder, aim the camera
lens at your subject.
OK
5. Select Record (left softkey) or press
to start recording with
the camcorder (up to 15 seconds). The LED lights red steadily.
6. Toendrecording,selectDone (leftsoftkey). (Yourvideowill
automaticallybesavedandthefirstframefromyourvideoisdisplayed.)
7. To play the video, select Playback (left softkey) and select Play
(right softkey).
8. Select Next (right softkey) to display the following options:
ⅷ
SendVideo to send the video to your recipients (see
“Sharing Video Mail From My Video” on page 122).
ⅷ
GotoCamcorder to return to Camcorder mode to take
another video.
ⅷ
Playback to play the video.
ⅷ
Upload to upload the video to the Web.
ⅷ
Erase to erase the video.
ⅷ
GotoMyVideo to view your videos saved in the camcorder.
Note: Your phone can save up to 30 pictures/videos in the camera/camcorder
(for example, 20 pictures and 10 videos) regardless of your settings and usage.
Note: Only the main LCD works as a viewfinder for the camcorder. When the
phone is closed, the camcorder does not work.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Camcorder Mode Options
When the phone is open and in Camcorder mode, several options are
available.
ᮣ
To switch the video screen between the full-screen view and
small view, press the navigation key up or down.
ᮣ
To select a zoom option (1x, 2x, or 4x), press the volume keys on
the side of your phone.
ᮣ
To select the desired brightness, press the navigation key right
(increase) or left (decrease).
ᮣ
To switch to Camera mode, press and hold
.
Note: While you are recording a video, these options are not available.
To display additional options, select Options (right softkey):
ᮣ
Self-timer: Activate the video’s timer function. See “Setting the
Self-timer” on page 115 for details.
ᮣ
MovieLight: Select On or Off.
ᮣ
Zoom: Select 1X, 2X, or 4X.
ᮣ
Brightness: Pressthenavigationkeyright(increase)orleft(decrease)
OK
toselectasettingandpress
toapplythedesiredsetting.
ᮣ
ᮣ
MyVideo: EntertheMyVideo-InCamcordermenutoviewvideoyou
havetaken(see“ViewingVideosinYourCamcorder” onpage130).
Go to Camera: Switch to Camera mode to take pictures.
Note: After taking a video, the Self-timer setting returns to Off.
Note: Exiting Camcorder mode resets MovieLight, Zoom, and Brightness to
their default settings.
Standby/Rec/Play
Brightness icon
Zoom icon
Camcorder mode icon
Movie Light icon
Self-timer icon
Progress gauge
CamcorderModeDisplay
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SM
Sharing Picture Mail
Once you’ve taken a picture or video, you can use the messaging
capabilities of your PCS Phone to instantly share it with family and
friends. You can send a picture or video to up to ten people at a time
using their email addresses or their PCS Vision Phone numbers.
Sharing Picture Mail From My Pictures
To share Picture Mail from the My Pictures menu:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyPictures and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamera and press
. (Thumbnail pictures are
displayed.)
5. Select the picture you’d like to send and select Send (left softkey).
6. To enter recipients to the Recipient List, highlight an option
OK
from the “Select address from” menu and press
.
ⅷ
PhoneBookto select recipients from your internal Phone
Book entries. (See “Selecting Recipients From Your Internal
Phone Book” on page 120.)
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
EnterMobile# to enter a recipient’s PCS Vision Phone number.
(You will be prompted to save it to your internal Phone Book.)
EnterEmail to enter a recipient’s email address. (You will be
prompted to save it to your internal Phone Book.)
GroupList to select recipients from your Group List. (See
“Selecting Recipients From Your Group List” on page 120.)
7. To add more recipients to the Recipient List, select Options (left
OK
softkey), highlight AddNewRecipient, and press
. You can
repeat step 6 above. To erase a recipient from the Recipient List,
highlight the recipient, select Options (left softkey), highlight
OK
Erase, and press
.
8. Select Next (right softkey) when you are finished
selecting/entering recipients. (You may include up to ten
recipients per Picture Mail.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. If you wish to record and include a Voice Memo with the picture
you are sending, select Start (left softkey), and start recording
after the beep. (Maximum recording time is 10 seconds). If you
do not wish to attach a Voice Memo to the Picture Mail, select
Skip (right softkey).
10. Use your keypad to enter a text message (or press the left
softkey to select from PresetMessages or RecentMessages) and
OK
select Next (right softkey) or press
. (See “Entering Text”
on page 26.) You may also choose to leave the message area
OK
blank; just select Skip (right softkey) or press
to continue.
11. In the Preview screen, confirm the recipients, voice memo,
message, and picture.
ⅷ
To confirm, change, or add a recipient, highlight the
recipient, and select Change (right softkey). The Recipient
List appears. Follow the instructions in step 7 on the
previous page to select or edit the recipient.
ⅷ
To confirm or change the voice memo, highlight Voice
Memo:Recorded, select Change (right softkey). The Play
Voice Memo screen appears. Select Start (left softkey) to
play the voice memo; select Options (right softkey) to
display further options (Play, Re-record, and Erase).
ⅷ
If you have skipped step 9 above and wish to add a voice
memo now, highlight AddVoiceMemo and select Add (right
softkey). The Add Voice Memo screen appears. Follow the
instructions in step 9.
ⅷ
To confirm, change, or add a text message, highlight the
message or AddTextMessage, select Change or Add (right
softkey). The Message screen appears. Follow the
instructions in step 10 to edit the text message.
12. From the Preview screen, select Send (left softkey) to send the
picture.
13. Waitforcompletionofthesendingprocess. (Youwillbeprompted,
OK
whencompleted.)Press
tocleartheprompt.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SelectingRecipientsFromYourInternalPhoneBook
To select Picture Mail recipients from your internal Phone Book:
1. From the “Select address from” menu, highlight PhoneBook and
OK
press
. (The Find Name screen appears with your internal
Phone Book list. This list only includes phone numbers you
labeled as Mobile and email addresses.)
2. Highlight a recipient’s name and select Select (left softkey) or
OK
press
. (This will check the box next to the recipient. If the
recipient has two or more addresses, the Details screen appears
for further selection.)
ⅷ
From the Details screen, highlight an email address or
OK
PCS Vision Phone number and press
. (Thiswillcheck
theboxnexttoarecipient’semailaddressorphonenumber.)
ToreturntotheFindNamescreen, selectDone (rightsoftkey).
3. To add more recipients, repeat step 2 above.
4. When you are finished, select Next (right softkey). (You will
return to the Recipient List with the selected recipients.)
SelectingRecipientsFromYourGroupList
To select Picture Mail recipients from your Group List:
1. From the “Select address from” menu, highlight GroupList and
OK
press
. (Your Group List appears.)
2. Highlight a recipient’s name and select Check or Uncheck (right
softkey). (This will check or clear the box next to the recipient’s
name.) Repeat it for all entries in the group list.
OK
3. When you are finished, press
. (You will return to the
Recipient List with the selected recipients.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sharing Picture Mail From Messaging
You can also share your pictures from your phone’s Messaging menu.
To share Picture Mail from the Messaging menu:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Messaging and press
to access the Messaging
menu.
Shortcut: Select Messaging (right softkey) from standby mode to access the
Messaging menu.
OK
3. Highlight Sendmessage and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Send PictureMail and press
. (Your pictures saved
in My Pictures - In Camera are displayed in thumbnail view.)
5. Use the navigation key to display the picture you wish to send
and select Select (left softkey).
6. To complete and send the Picture Mail, follow steps 6-13 in
“Sharing Picture Mail From My Pictures” on page 118.
Tip: To view incoming Picture Mail message, see “Viewing Incoming
Picture/Video Mail Messages” on page 160.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sharing Video Mail From My Video
To share Video Mail from the My Video menu:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyVideo and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamcorder and press
. (Video icons are
displayed.)
5. Highlight a video icon and select Playback (left softkey) or press
OK
. (The first frame from the selected video is displayed.)
6. Press the navigation key left or right to select the video you'd
like to send and select Send (left softkey).
7. To complete and send the video, follow steps 6-13 in “Sharing
Picture Mail From My Pictures” on page 118. (In the Preview
screen, a video icon will be displayed in place of a picture.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sharing Video Mail From Messaging
You can also share your video from your phone’s Messaging menu.
To share Video Mail from the Messaging menu:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Messaging and press
to access the Messaging
menu.
Shortcut: Select Messaging (right softkey) from standby mode to access the
Messaging menu.
OK
3. Highlight Sendmessage and press
.
OK
4. Highlight SendVideoMail and press
. (Video icons from My
Video - In Camcorder are displayed.)
OK
5. Highlight a video icon and press
. (The first frame from the
selected video is displayed.)
6. Press the navigation key left or right to select the video you wish
to send and select Select (left softkey).
7. To complete and send the Video Mail, follow steps 6-13 in
“Sharing Picture Mail From My Pictures” on page 118.
Tip: To view incoming Video Mail message, see “Viewing Incoming
Picture/Video Mail Messages” on page 160.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing Pictures
Once a picture is taken, it is automatically saved to your camera.
From the My Pictures menu you can view all the pictures you have
taken, store selected images in your phone, send pictures to the Picture
Mail Website, delete images, and access additional picture options.
Viewing Pictures in Your Camera
To view pictures saved in your camera:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
Shortcut: To access the Pictures/Video menu, press
from standby mode.
OK
3. Highlight MyPictures and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamera and press
. (Thumbnail pictures are
displayed.)
5. Use your navigation key to scroll through and view the pictures.
OK
6. To expand the selected picture, press
. (To return to
BACK
thumbnail view, press
.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
InCameraOptions
To display additional options for the selected picture, select Options
(right softkey) from the thumbnail view or full-screen view. To select
OK
an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
Upload to upload a picture to the Web. (See “Uploading Pictures”
on page 126.)
ᮣ
Assign to assign a picture to phone tasks. (See “Assigning Pictures
to Phone Tasks” on page 128.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
Erase to erase pictures.
EditCaption to edit the picture’s caption. (See “Entering Text” on
page 26.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
PictureInfo to display information on the selected picture, such as
caption, time/date, size, etc.
Expand/Thumbnail to switch the display between thumbnail view
and full-screen.
GotoCamerato switch to Camera mode to take pictures.
Tip: To send the selected picture, select Send (left softkey) from the thumbnail
view or full-screen view.
Tip: To switch to Camera mode, press
from the In Camera menu.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uploading Pictures
Touploadpicturesfromyourphone’scameratothePictureMailWebsite:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyPictures and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamera and press
. (Thumbnail pictures are
displayed.)
5. Use your navigation key to select the picture you want to upload.
6. Select Options (right softkey).
OK
7. Highlight Upload and press
.
OK
8. Highlight Uploadthis or Uploadall and press
to upload a
single picture or all pictures saved in your camera. (Depending
on your settings, you may be prompted to accept a PCS Vision
connection.)
9. Wait for completion of the uploading process. (You will be
prompted, when completed.)
OK
10. Press
to clear the prompt. (You will be prompted to erase
the pictures from your camera.)
OK
11. Highlight Yes to erase or No to cancel and press
.
Note: Uploading copies pictures from your phone’s My Pictures to your online
Picture Mail account. Pictures which have been uploaded to your online account
will remain available in My Pictures until you erase them.
Tip: The
icon will appear on the uploaded pictures.
Note: If this is the first time you have accessed the Picture Mail account, you will
be prompted to create your Picture Mail password. See “Creating Your Picture
Mail Password” on page 158.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Downloaded Pictures
To view pictures downloaded from the Picture Mail Website:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyPictures and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Downloaded/Assigned and press
. (Thumbnail
pictures are displayed.)
5. Use your navigation key to scroll through and view the pictures.
6. To switch the display between full-screen and thumbnail view,
select Expand or Thumbnail (left softkey).
7. To display additional options, select Options (right softkey) from
the thumbnail view:
ⅷ
Assign to assign a picture to phone tasks. (See “Assigning
Pictures to Phone Tasks” on page 128.)
ⅷ
Erase to erase pictures.
Note: The downloaded/assigned picture's caption will be replaced with date
and time when the picture was taken.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Assigning Pictures to Phone Tasks
To assign a picture saved in My Pictures to display for specific tasks:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyPictures and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamera or Downloaded/Assigned and press
.
(Thumbnail pictures are displayed.)
5. Use your navigation key to select a desired picture.
6. Select Options (right softkey).
OK
7. Highlight Assign and press
. (Phone tasks are displayed.)
8. To assign the selected picture to a specific task, highlight it and
OK
press
:
ⅷ
ScreenSaver to display the picture on the main display as a
screen saver.
ⅷ
PhoneBook to display the picture for incoming calls from a
specific internal Phone Book entry.
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Scheduler to display the picture on a scheduled event.
SubLCD to display the picture on the sub display.
MainMenu to display the picture on the main menu.
MyMenu to display the picture on My Menu.
Note: A picture may be assigned to more than one task.
Note: Assigning a picture from the In Camera menu to any of the first four tasks
copies the picture to the Downloaded/Assigned folder. (The copied picture's
caption will be replaced with date and time when the picture was taken.)
Assigning a picture from the In Camera menu to Main Menu or My Menu copies
the picture to the dedicated folder.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing Pictures
To erase pictures saved in My Pictures:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyPictures and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamera or Downloaded/Assigned and press
.
(Thumbnail pictures are displayed.)
5. Use your navigation key to select a picture.
6. Select Options (right softkey).
OK
7. Highlight Erase and press
.
OK
8. Highlight Erasethis or Eraseall and press
to erase a single
picture or all pictures saved in the folder. (You will be prompted
to confirm.)
OK
9. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Note: Erasing pictures from the In Camera menu will free up memory space in
your phone to enable you to take more pictures and videos. Once erased,
pictures cannot be uploaded to your online Picture Mail account.
Note: IfyoueraseapictureassignedtoaphonetaskfromtheDownloaded/Assigned
folder, theerasedpicturewillnolongerbedisplayedfortheassignedtask.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing Videos
Once a video is taken, it is automatically saved to your camcorder.
From the My Video menu you can view all the videos you have taken,
store selected images in your phone, send videos to the Picture Mail
Website, delete images, and access additional video options.
Viewing Videos in Your Camcorder
To view a video saved in your camcorder:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyVideo and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamcorder and press
. (Video icons are
displayed.)
5. Highlight a video icon and select Playback (left softkey) or press
OK
. (The first frame from the selected video is displayed.)
ⅷ
To switch the video screen between the full-screen view
and small view, press the navigation key up or down.
ⅷ
To select another video, press the navigation key left or right.
6. To play the video, select Play (right softkey) from the full-screen
view or small view. (To adjust volume, press the volume keys on
the side of your phone.)
BACK
7. To return to the video icons screen, press
from the full-
screen view or small view.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
InCamcorderOptions
To display additional options from the video icons screen, highlight
an icon and select Options (right softkey). To select an option,
OK
highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
SendVideo to send a video to your recipients.
ᮣ
Upload to upload a video to the Web. (See “Uploading Videos” on
page 132.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
Erase to erase a video.
EditCaption to edit the video’s caption. (See “Entering Text” on
page 26.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
VideoInfo to display information on the selected video, such as
caption, time/date, size, etc.
GotoCamcorder to switch to Camcorder mode to take a video.
Tip: To switch to Camcorder mode, press
from the In Camcorder menu.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Uploading Videos
To upload videos from your phone’s camcorder to the Picture Mail
Website:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyVideo and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamcorder and press
. (Video icons are
displayed.)
5. Use your navigation key to select the video you want to upload.
6. Select Options (right softkey).
OK
7. Highlight Upload and press
.
OK
8. HighlightUploadthis orUploadall andpress
touploada
singlevideoorallvideossavedinyourcamcorder. (Dependingon
yoursettings, youmaybepromptedtoacceptaPCSVision
connection.)
9. Wait for completion of the uploading process. (You will be
prompted, when completed.)
OK
10. Press
to clear the prompt. (You will be prompted to erase
the video from your camcorder.)
OK
11. Highlight Yes to erase or No to cancel and press
.
Note: Uploading copies videos from your phone’s My Video to your online
Picture Mail account. The videos which have been uploaded to your online
account will remain available in My Video until you erase them.
Tip: The
icon will appear on the uploaded video.
Note: If this is the first time you have accessed the Picture Mail account, you will
be prompted to create your Picture Mail password. See “Creating Your Picture
Mail Password” on page 158.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Viewing Downloaded Videos
To view videos downloaded from the Picture Mail Website:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyVideo and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Downloaded/Saved and press
. (Video icons are
displayed.)
5. Highlight a video icon and select Playback (left softkey) or press
OK
. (The first frame from the selected video is displayed.)
ⅷ
To switch the video screen between the full-screen view
and small view, press the navigation key up or down.
ⅷ
To select another video, press the navigation key left or right.
6. To play the video, select Play (right softkey) from the full-screen
view or small view. (To adjust volume, press the volume keys on
the side of your phone.)
7. To return to the video icons screen, select Thumbnail (left
BACK
softkey) or press
from the full-screen view or small view.
8. To erase a video from the video icons screen, highlight the
video icon and select Erase (right softkey).
Note: The downloaded video's caption will be replaced with date and time when
the video was recorded.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing Videos
To erase videos saved in My Video - In Camcorder:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyVideo and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamcorder and press
. (Video icons are
displayed.)
5. Use your navigation key to select a video.
6. Select Options (right softkey).
OK
7. Highlight Erase and press
.
OK
8. Highlight Erasethis or Eraseall and press
to erase a single
video or all videos saved in the folder. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
9. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Note: Erasing videos from the In Camcorder menu will free up memory space in
your phone to enable you to take more videos and pictures. Once erased, videos
cannot be uploaded to your online Picture Mail account.
To erase videos saved in My Video - Downloaded/Saved:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyVideo and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Downloaded/Saved and press
. (Video icons are
displayed.)
5. Use your navigation key to select a video.
6. Select Erase (right softkey).
OK
7. Highlight Erasethis or Eraseall and press
to erase a single
video or all videos saved in the folder. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
8. Highlight Yes and press
to erase.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Managing Picture Mail
Using the Picture Mail Website
Once you have uploaded pictures or videos from your phone to your
online Picture Mail account (see “Uploading Pictures” on page 126 or
“Uploading Videos” on page 132), you can use your personal
computer to manage your pictures and videos. From the Picture Mail
Website you can share pictures and videos, edit album titles and
picture/video captions, organize and move images, and do much more.
You will also have access to picture management tools to improve
and customize your pictures. You’ll be able to lighten, darken, crop,
antique, add comic bubbles and cartoon effects, and use other
features to transform your pictures.
To access the Picture Mail Website:
1. From your computer’s Internet connection, go to
2. Enter your PCS Phone Number and Picture Mail password to
register. (See “Creating Your Picture Mail Password” on page 158.)
Managing Online Picture Mail From Your PCS Phone
You can use your phone to manage, edit, or share pictures and videos
you have uploaded to the Picture Mail Website. (See “Uploading
Pictures” on page 126 and “Uploading Videos” on page 132 for
information about uploading.)
To view your online Picture Mail from your PCS Phone:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
.
Shortcut: Instead of steps 1 and 2 above, press
.
OK
3. Highlight Online Albums and press
. Depending on your
settings you may be prompted to accept a PCS Vision connection.
(The Online Albums menu appears.)
OK
4. Highlight Uploads or an album title and press
.
(Thumbnail pictures and videos, up to nine per screen, are
displayed.)
5. Use your navigation key to select a picture or video and
select View (left softkey) to expand it.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Sharing Online Picture Mail
To share online Picture Mail:
1. From the Uploads screen or an album screen, select a picture or
video you wish to share and select Options (right softkey).
(See “Accessing Online Picture Mail Options From Your PCS
Phone” on page 138.)
OK
2. Highlight SendPicture or SendVideo and press
.
3. To enter recipients to the Recipient List, highlight an option
OK
from the “Select address from” menu and press
.
ⅷ
PhoneBookto select recipients from your internal Phone
Book entries. (See “Selecting Recipients From Your Internal
Phone Book” on page 120.)
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
EnterMobile# to enter a recipient’s PCS Vision Phone number.
(You will be prompted to save it to your internal Phone Book.)
EnterEmail to enter a recipient’s email address. (You will be
prompted to save it to your internal Phone Book.)
GroupList to select recipients from your Group List. (See
“Selecting Recipients From Your Group List” on page 120.)
OnlineAddressBk to select recipients from your Online
Address Book (your sharing history from the Web).
OK
Highlight a recipient and press
. (This will check the
box next to the recipient.) To clear the box, highlight it and
OK
press
. When you are finished, select Done (left
softkey). (You will return to the Recipient List with the
selected recipients.)
4. To add more recipients to the Recipient List, select Options (left
OK
softkey), highlight AddNewRecipient, and press
. You can
repeat step 3 above. To erase a recipient from the Recipient List,
highlight the recipient, select Options (left softkey), highlight
OK
Erase, and press
.
5. SelectNext (rightsoftkey)whenyouarefinishedselecting/entering
recipients. (Youmayincludeuptotenrecipients.)
6. If you wish to record and include a Voice Memo with the picture
or video you are sending, select Start (left softkey), and start
recording after the beep. (Maximum recording time is 10
seconds). If you do not wish to attach a Voice Memo to the
Picture Mail, select Skip (right softkey).
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Use your keypad to enter a text message (or press the left
softkey to select from PresetMessages or RecentMessages) and
OK
select Next (right softkey) or press
. (See “Entering Text”
on page 26.) You may also choose to leave the message area
OK
blank; just select Skip (right softkey) or press
to continue.
8. In the Preview screen, confirm the recipients, voice memo, and
message.
ⅷ
To confirm, change, or add a recipient, highlight the
recipient and select Change (right softkey). The Recipient
List appears. Follow the instructions in steps 3 and 4 on the
previous page to select or edit the recipient.
ⅷ
To confirm or change the voice memo, highlight Voice
Memo:Recorded, select Change (right softkey). The Play
Voice Memo screen appears. Select Start (left softkey) to
play the voice memo; select Options (right softkey) to
display further options (Play, Re-record, and Erase).
ⅷ
If you have skipped step 6 on the previous page and wish to
add a voice memo now, highlight AddVoiceMemo and select
Add (right softkey). The Add Voice Memo screen appears.
Follow the instructions in step 6.
ⅷ
To confirm, change, or add a text message, highlight the
message or AddTextMessage and select Change or Add (right
softkey). The Message screen appears. Follow the
instructions in step 7 to edit the text message.
9. From the Preview screen, select Send (left softkey) to send the
picture or video.
To share an album from online mode:
1. From the Online Albums menu, select an album you wish to
share and select Options (right softkey). (See “Accessing Online
Picture Mail Options From Your PCS Phone” on page 138.)
OK
2. Highlight SendAlbum and press
.
3. Follow steps 3-9 in “Sharing Online Picture Mail” on page 136 to
complete and send your album. (The Voice Memo option is not
available for sending an album.)
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing Online Picture Mail Options From Your PCS Phone
To access online Picture Mail options from your phone:
1. Select a picture or video from the Uploads screen or an album
screen (see “Managing Online Picture Mail From Your PCS
Phone” on page 135).
2. Select Options (right softkey) to display options.
OK
3. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
SendPicture or SendVideo to share a picture or video
through the Picture Mail Website. (See “Sharing Online
Picture Mail” on page 136.)
ⅷ
Copy/Move to copy or move pictures or video to a
selected album:
Copythis tocopytheselectedpictureorvideotothealbum.
Copyall to copy all pictures and videos in the current
album (or Uploads) to the target album.
Movethis to move the selected picture or video
to the album.
Moveall to move all pictures and videos in the current
album (or Uploads) to the target album.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Download to copy the selected picture or video to your
phone’s My Picture or My Video.
MediaView to switch the display mode for the current
album (or Uploads). Select PicturesOnly or VideoOnly to
display either pictures or videos; select AllMedia to display
both pictures and videos. (The Media View option appears
when the album includes both pictures and videos.)
ⅷ
Erase to select Erasethis or Eraseall to erase a single
picture/video or all pictures/videos saved in the current
album (or Uploads).
ⅷ
ⅷ
EditCaption to edit the picture’s or video’s caption.
RotatePicture to rotate the selected picture. (This option is
only available for pictures.)
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
CreateAlbum to create a new album. Enter the album name
OK
and press
.
OnlineAlbumsto switch from pictures or videos to the
album list.
PictureInfo or VideoInfo to display information on the
selected picture or video, such as title, time/date, size, etc.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To access your online Albums options from your PCS Phone:
1. Display the album list in the Online Albums menu.
2. Use your navigation key to select an album (or Uploads).
3. Select Options (right softkey) to display options.
OK
4. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ⅷ
Send Album to share the album through the Picture Mail
Website. (See “Sharing Online Picture Mail” on page 136.)
ⅷ
CreateAlbum to create a new album. Enter a new album
OK
name and press
.
ⅷ
ⅷ
EraseAlbum to delete the selected album.
Rename Album to rename the selected album. Enter a new
OK
name and press
.
ⅷ
AlbumInfo to display information on the selected album,
such as title, time/date, and number of files.
Note:The Uploads folder cannot be erased or renamed.
Section 2: Understanding Your PCS Phone
2J: UsingYour Phone’s Camera With Camcorder
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Using
PCS Service Features
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3A
PCS Service Features:
The Basics
In This Section
ᮣ
UsingVoicemail
ᮣ
UsingCallerID
ᮣ
RespondingtoCallWaiting
ᮣ
MakingaThree-WayCall
ᮣ
UsingCallForwarding
ow that you’ve mastered your phone’s fundamentals, it’s time to
Nexplore the calling features that enhance your PCS Service.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Voicemail
Setting Up Your Voicemail
All unanswered calls to your PCS Phone are automatically transferred
to voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned off. Therefore,
you will want to set up your PCS Voicemail and personal greeting as
soon as your PCS Phone is activated.
To set up voicemail:
1
1. Press and hold
.
2. Follow the system prompts to create your pass code, record
your greeting, record your name announcement, and choose
whether to activate One-Touch Message Access (a feature that
lets you press one key to access messages and bypasses the
need for you to enter your pass code).
Note: The voicemail setup process may vary in certain Affiliate areas.
Voicemail Notification
There are several ways your PCS Phone alerts you:
ᮣ
By displaying a message on the screen.
ᮣ
By sounding the assigned ringer type.
ᮣ
By the LED blinking red.
ᮣ
By displaying
at the top of your screen. (This icon blinks for
an urgent message.)
New Voicemail Message Alerts
When you receive a new voice message, your phone alerts you and
prompts you to call your voicemail. To call your voicemail, select Call
OK
TALK
(left softkey), select Voicemail, and press
or
.
Important: When you are roaming off the enhanced Sprint Nationwide
PCS Network, you may not receive notification of new voicemail messages. It is
recommended that you periodically check your voicemail by dialing 1 + area
code + your PCS Phone Number. When your voicemail answers, press
enter your pass code. You will be charged roaming rates when accessing
voicemail while roaming off the enhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.
and
Note: Your phone accepts messages even when it is turned off. However, you are
only notified of new messages when your phone is turned on and you are in a
PCS Service Area.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages
You can review your messages directly from your PCS Phone or from
any other touch-tone phone. To dial from your PCS Phone, you can
either speed dial your voicemail or use the menu keys.
UsingOne-TouchMessageAccess
1
Ⅵ
Press and hold
. Follow the system prompts.
UsingtheMenuKeysonYourPCSPhonetoAccessYourMessages
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Voicemail and press
.
OK
3. Highlight CallVoicemail and press
.
Note: You are charged for airtime minutes when you are accessing your
voicemail from your PCS Phone.
UsingaPhoneOtherThanYourPCSPhonetoAccessMessages
1. Dial your PCS Phone Number.
2. When your voicemail answers, press
.
3. Enter your pass code.
Tip: When you call into voicemail you first hear the header information (date,
time, and sender information) for the message. To skip directly to the message,
4
press
during the header.
VoicemailButtonGuide
Here’s a quick guide to your keypad functions while listening to
voicemail messages. For further details and menu options, see
“Voicemail Menu Key” on page 147.
1
2
3
Date/Time Send Reply Advance
5
6
4
Replay
Rewind
Forward
7
8
9
Erase
Call Back
Save
#
0
Cancel
Help
Skip
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voicemail Options
Your PCS Phone offers several options for organizing and accessing
your voicemail.
UsingExpertMode
Using the Expert Mode setting for your personal voicemail box helps
you navigate through the voicemail system more quickly by
shortening the voice prompts you hear at each level.
To turn Expert Mode on or off:
1
1. Press and hold
to access your voicemail. If your voicemail
box contains any new or saved messages, press
to access
the main voicemail menu.
3
2. Following the system prompts, press
to change your
Personal Options.
4
3. Press
for Expert Mode.
1
4. Press
to turn Expert Mode on or off.
SettingUpGroupDistributionLists
Create up to 20 separate group lists, each with up to 20 customers.
1
1. Press and hold
to access your voicemail. If your voicemail
box contains any new or saved messages, press
the main voicemail menu.
to access
3
2. Following the system prompts, press
to change your
Personal Options.
2
3. Press
for Administrative Options.
for Group Distribution Lists.
5
4. Press
5. Follow the voice prompts to create, edit, rename, or delete
group lists.
PCSCallback
Return a call after listening to a message without disconnecting
from voicemail.
8
1. After listening to a message, press
.
2. Once the call is complete, you’re returned to the voicemail
main menu.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voicemail-to-VoicemailMessage
Record and send a voice message to other PCS Voicemail users.
2
1. From the main voicemail menu, press
to send a message.
2. Follow the voice prompts to enter the phone number.
3. Follow the voice prompts to record and send your voice
message.
Voicemail-to-VoicemailMessageReply
Reply to a voice message received from any other PCS Voicemail user.
2
1. After listening to a voice message, press
.
2. Follow the voice prompts to record and send your reply.
Voicemail-to-VoicemailMessageForwarding
Forward a voice message, except those marked “Private,” to other
PCS Voicemail users.
6
1. After listening to a message, press
.
2. Follow the voice prompts to enter the phone number.
3. Follow the voice prompts to record your introduction and
forward the voice message.
Voicemail-to-VoicemailReceiptRequest
Receive confirmation that your voice message has been
listened to when you send, forward, or reply to other PCS users.
1
1. After you have recorded a message, press
to indicate
you are satisfied with the message you recorded.
4
2. Press
3. Press
to mark receipt requested.
1
to send your voicemail message.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ContinueRecording
1
Ⅵ
Before pressing
to indicate you are satisfied with the
4
message you recorded, press
to continue recording.
ExtendedAbsenceGreeting
When your phone is turned off or you are off the enhanced Sprint
Nationwide PCS Network for an extended period, this greeting can
be played instead of your normal personal greeting.
3
1. From the main voicemail menu, press
for Personal Options.
3
2. Press
for Greetings.
to record an Extended Absence Greeting.
3
3. Press
Clearing the Message Icon
Your phone may temporarily continue to display the message icon
after you have checked your voice and text messages.
To clear the icon from the display screen:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Voicemail and press
.
OK
3. Highlight ClearIcon and press
. (You will be prompted to
confirm.)
OK
4. Highlight Yes and press
to clear the icon.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voicemail Menu Key
1
Listen
1
Envelope Information
2
3
Reply
Advance 8 Seconds
Replay
4
5
Rewind
6
7
8
9
Forward Message
Erase
Callback
Save
0
Options
2
3
Send a Message
Personal Options
1
Notification Options
1
Phone Notification
2
Numeric Paging to a PCS Phone
Return to Personal Options Menu
2
Administrative Options
1
Skip Pass code
2
Autoplay
3
Message Date & Time On/Off
4
Change Pass code
5
Group Distribution List
Return to Personal Options Menu
Greetings
3
1
Personal Greetings
2
Name Announcement
3
Extended Absence Greeting
Return to Personal Options Menu
4
Expert Mode
On/Off
8
Place a Call
Disconnect
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Caller ID
Caller ID lets people know who’s calling by displaying the number of
the person calling.
To block your phone number from being displayed for a specific
outgoing call:
6
7
1. Press
.
2. Enter the number you want to call.
TALK
3. Press
.
To permanently block your number, call PCS Customer Solutions.
Responding to Call Waiting
When you’re on a call, Call Waiting alerts you to incoming calls by
sounding a beep. Your phone’s screen informs you that another call is
coming in and displays the caller’s phone number (if it is available
and you are in digital mode).
To respond to an incoming call while you’re on a call:
TALK
Ⅵ
Press
. (This puts the first caller on hold and answers the
second call.)
To switch back to the first caller:
TALK
Ⅵ
Press
again.
Tip: For those calls where you don’t want to be interrupted, you can temporarily
7
0
disable Call Waiting by pressing
before placing your call. Call
Waiting is automatically reactivated once you end the call.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making a Three-Way Call
With Three-Way Calling, you can talk to two people at the same time.
When using this feature, the normal airtime rates will be charged for
each of the two calls.
To place a Three-Way Call:
TALK
1. Enter a number you wish to call and press
.
TALK
2. Once you have established the connection, press
, highlight 3-WayCall, and press
on hold.
(or press
MENU
OK
) to put the first caller
TALK
3. Enter the second number you wish to call and press
(or
).
OK
select Options (right softkey), highlight Call, and press
TALK
4. When you’re connected to the second party, press
again
MENU
OK
(or press
, highlight Flash, and press
) to begin your
three-way call.
If one of the people you called hangs up during your call, you and the
remaining caller stay connected. If you initiated the call and are the
first to hang up, all three callers are disconnected.
Tip: In step 3 above, you can also call a phone number stored in your internal
MENU
Phone Book or Call History. To access these menus, press
, highlight
OK
Phone Book or Call History, and press
. To call the third party, highlight the
TALK
number and press
.
Note: Call Waiting and Three-Way Calling are not available while roaming off the
enhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding lets you forward all your incoming calls to another
phone number – even when your phone is turned off. You can
continue to make calls from your phone when Call Forwarding is
activated.
To activate Call Forwarding:
7
2
1. Press
.
2. Enter the area code and phone number to which incoming calls
should be forwarded.
TALK
3. Press
. You will hear a tone to confirm the activation of Call
Forwarding.
To deactivate Call Forwarding:
7
2
0
1. Press
.
TALK
2. Press
. You will hear a tone to confirm the deactivation.
Note: You are charged a higher rate for calls you have forwarded.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3A: PCS Service Features –The Basics
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3B
SM
PCS Vision
In This Section
ᮣ
GettingStarted
SM
ᮣ
Picture Mail
ᮣ
Messaging
ᮣ
Games
ᮣ
Ringers
ᮣ
ScreenSavers
ᮣ
Web
SM
ᮣ
PCSBusinessConnection
SM
CS Vision brings you clarity you can see and hear with advanced
Pmultimedia services. These features, including Picture Mail,
PCS Mail and PCS Short Mail, chat, games, downloadable ringers and
SM
screen savers, Web access, and PCS Business Connection , are easy to
learn and use and the rich, colorful graphic experience is visually
comparable to your home or office computer. Clearly, it’s a whole new
way to look at wireless.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started With PCS Vision
With your PCS Vision Phone and PCS Service, you are ready to start
enjoying the advantages of PCS Vision. This section will help you
learn the basics of using your PCS Vision services, including
managing your User Name, launching a Vision connection, and
navigating the Web with your PCS Vision Phone.
Your User Name
When you buy a PCS Vision Phone and sign up for service, you're
automatically assigned a User Name. Then, when you use
PCS Vision services, your User Name is submitted to identify you to
the enhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network. The User Name is
also useful as an address for PCS Mail, as a way to personalize Web
services, and as an online virtual identity.
A User Name is typically based on your name and a number, followed
by “@sprintpcs.com.” For example, the third John Smith to sign up
Name. If you want a particular User Name, you can visit
www.sprintpcs.com and get the name you want – as long as nobody
else has it.
Note: If you already have a PCS Mail User Name, that will automatically become
your PCS Vision User Name.
Your User Name will be automatically programmed into your
PCS Phone. You don't have to enter it.
FindingYourUserName
If you aren't sure what your PCS Vision User Name is, you can easily
find it online or on your PCS Phone:
ᮣ
PCS Phone Number and password. Your User Name appears in
My Personal Information.
ᮣ
OnyourPCSPhone: Your User Name can be found through your
phone’s main menu: Settings > Information > PhoneInfo.
(When you have a PCS Vision connection.)
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Launching a PCS Vision Connection
To launch a PCS Vision connection:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Web and press
.Your PCS Vision connection will
launch and the PCS Vision Home page will display.
The PCS Vision Home Page
This is subject to change.
Shortcut: You can also press the navigation key left (Web) from standby mode to
launch the Web.
Note: If Net Guard is enabled and displayed (see page 154), select OK (left
softkey) to continue and launch the Web.
While connecting, the following will appear on the screen:
Connecting....
If you had a previous PCS Vision connection, the last page you visited
will display when you launch your browser, for example, PCS Short
Mail or ESPN Top News. When this occurs, you may not see the
“Connecting ...” message when you launch the session. Though the
browser is open, you are not currently in an active data session - that
is, no data is being sent or received. As soon as you navigate to
another page, the active session will launch and you will see the
“Connecting ...” message.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Net Guard
When you first connect to the Web, the Net Guard will appear to
confirm that you want to connect. This feature helps you avoid
accidental connections. You can disable the Net Guard in the future
by selecting AlwaysAuto-Connect when the Net Guard is displayed.
To change your Net Guard settings:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
3. Highlight PCSVision and press
4. Highlight NetGuard and press
.
OK
.
OK
.
OK
5. Highlight On or Off and press
.
ⅷ
Onto activate the Net Guard.
ⅷ
Off to deactivate the Net Guard.
Note: When enabled, the Net Guard appears only once per session. The Net
Guard does not appear if the phone is merely re-connecting due to a time-out.
PCS Vision Connection Status and Indicators
Your phone's display lets you know the current status of your
PCS Vision connection through indicators which appear at the top
of the screen. The following symbols are used:
Your PCS Vision connection is active (data is being transferred).
Incoming voice calls go directly to voicemail; outgoing voice
calls can be made, but the PCS Vision connection will terminate.
Your PCS Vision connection is dormant (no data is being sent
or received). Though not currently active, when dormant the
phone can restart an active connection quickly; voice calls can
be made and received.
Your phone is not currently able to access PCS Vision service
features.
If no indicator appears, your phone does not have a current
PCS Vision connection. To launch a connection, see “Launching a
PCS Vision Connection” on page 153.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Signing In and Out of PCS Vision Services
You can sign out of PCS Vision services without turning off your
phone; however you will not have access to all PCS Vision services,
including Web and messaging. Signing out will avoid any charges
associated with PCS Vision services. While signed out, you can still
place or receive phone calls, check voicemail, and use other voice
services. You may sign in again at any time.
To sign out of PCS Vision services:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight PCSVision and press
.
OK
4. Highlight DisablePCSVision and press
. (A message will
appear.)
5. Select OK (right softkey) to confirm that you want to sign out.
To sign in to PCS Vision services:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight PCSVision and press
.
OK
4. Highlight EnablePCSVision and press
. (The Net Guard will
appear, if enabled.)
Updating Your Vision Profile
If you have changed the programmed User Name into a new one, you
have to update the Vision Profile in your PCS Phone by following
these steps:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Settings and press
.
OK
3. Highlight PCSVision and press
.
OK
4. Highlight UpdateProfile and press
. (You will be prompted
to confirm.)
OK
5. Highlight Yes and press
to proceed. (When completed,
the phone will return to the PCS Vision menu.)
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Navigating the Web
Navigating through menus and Websites during a PCS Vision
session is easy once you've learned a few basics. Here are some tips
for getting around:
Softkeys
During a PCS Vision session, the bottom line of your phone's display
contains one or more softkey labels. These keys are shortcut controls
for navigating around the Web, and they correspond to the softkeys
directly below the phone’s display screen. Depending on which
Websites you visit, the softkey labels may change to indicate their
function.
To use softkeys, simply press the desired softkey. If an additional pop-
up menu appears when you press the softkey, select the menu items
using your keypad (if they’re numbered) or by highlighting the
OK
option and pressing
.
Scrolling
As with other parts of your phone's menu, you'll have to scroll up and
down to see everything on some Websites.
Ⅵ
Press the navigation key up and down to scroll line by line or
press the volume buttons on the side of the phone to scroll one
page at a time.
Tip: If sound is available from the Web page you are viewing, press the volume
buttons on the side of the phone to adjust the volume.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting
Once you've learned how to use softkeys and scroll, you can start
navigating Websites.
ᮣ
Select on-screen items by using the navigation key to highlight the
OK
desired item, then press the desired softkey button (or press
).
You'll find that the left softkey is used primarily for selecting items.
This softkey is often labeled “OK” or “Select.”
ᮣ
If the items on a page are numbered, you can use your keypad
(number keys) to select an item.
Links, which appear as underlined text, allow you to jump to
different Web pages, select special functions, or even place
phone calls.
ᮣ
Select links by highlighting the link and then selecting the
appropriate softkey.
Tip: The tenth item in a numbered list may be selected by pressing
0
the
key on your phone’s keypad, even though the number 0 doesn’t appear
on the screen.
GoingBack
BACK
Ⅵ
To go back one page, press the
key on your phone. (Note
key is also used for deleting text (like a
BACKSPACE key) when you are entering text.)
BACK
that the
GoingHome
Ⅵ
To return to the PCS Vision Home Page from any other Web
BACK
page, press and hold
.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SM
Picture Mail
Your phone gives you the ability to take pictures and videos, view them
using the phone's display, and instantly send them to your friends and
family. It's as easy to use as a traditional point-and-click camera.
In addition to sending your pictures and videos to friends and family,
you can also send them to a Picture Mail Website for storage or upload
them to a personal Website. Cameras can take and store pictures and
the image quality is similar to what you see on your computer screen.
Taking Pictures and Videos
To take pictures with the built-in Camera:
Ⅵ
See “Taking Pictures” on page 110.
To take videos with the built-in Camcorder:
Ⅵ
See “Taking Videos” on page 116.
Sharing Picture/Video Mail From Your PCS Phone
CreatingYourPictureMailPassword
The first time you use any of the Picture Mail management options
involving the Picture Mail Website you will need to establish a
password through your PCS Phone. This password will also allow
to access and manage your uploaded pictures.
To create your password:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Pictures/Video and press
to access the
Pictures/Video menu.
OK
3. Highlight MyPictures and press
.
OK
4. Highlight InCamera and press
.
OK
5. Select Options (right softkey), highlight Upload, and press
.
(You will be prompted to create your account password.)
OK
Shortcut: From step 3 above, highlight Online Albums and press
.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OK
6. Select OK (left softkey) or press
to display the Password
screen.
7. Enter a four- to eight-digit, alpha-numeric password and
OK
press
.
OK
8. SelectSave (leftsoftkey)orpress
. (You will be prompted to
confirm your password.)
Tip: Write down your Picture Mail password in a secure place.
9. Please wait while the system creates your account.
Once you have received confirmation that your account has been
successfully registered you may upload and share pictures and access
the Picture Mail Website.
SendingPicture/VideoMailtoOthersFromYourPCSPhone
To send Picture/Video Mail from your phone:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. HighlightMessaging andpress
toaccesstheMessagingmenu.
OK
3. Highlight Sendmessage and press
.
OK
4. Highlight SendPictureMailorSendVideoMail and press
.
5. From the In Camera or In Camcorder screen, select the desired
picture or video and select Select (left softkey).
6. Enter a recipient’s email address or PCS Vision Phone number,
or retrieve the information from your internal Phone Book or
Group List. Add up to 10 recipients.
7. SelectNext (rightsoftkey)whenyouarefinishedaddingrecipients.
8. AddavoicememotothePictureMailorVideoMail.
9. Add a text message to the Picture Mail or Video Mail and select
OK
Next (right softkey) or press
.
10. Select Send (left softkey) to send the Picture Mail or Video Mail.
Tip: For complete instructions on sending Picture/Video Mail, see “Sharing
Picture Mail” on page 118.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New Picture/Video Mail Message Notifications
There are several ways your PCS Vision Phone alerts you of incoming
Picture/Video Mail messages:
ᮣ
By displaying a message on the screen.
ᮣ
By sounding the assigned ringer type.
ᮣ
By the LED blinking red.
ᮣ
By displaying
at the top of your screen.
Viewing Incoming Picture/Video Mail Messages
To display incoming Picture/Video Mail messages:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Messaging and press
.
OK
3. Highlight PictureMail and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Inbox and press
. (A list of Picture/Video Mail
messages will display.)
OK
5. Highlight the message you want to view and press
to
display the notification.
6. To display the picture or video, select Go (left softkey).
(Your phone will access the Picture Mail Website to display the
selected Picture/Video Mail message.)
Icons
New message
Read message
Locked message
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PictureMailInboxOptions
When the message list or an individual message is displayed in your
Picture Mail Inbox, select Options (right softkey) to display the
following options. To select an option, highlight it and press
OK
.
ᮣ
Go to go to the Web page to view a picture or video.
ᮣ
Call to display the sender's phone number. To dial the number,
TALK
OK
press
or
Lock/Unlock to lock or unlock the message. (Locked messages are
marked with and prevented from automatic deleting.)
.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
SavetoP-Book to save the sender’s phone number to your internal
Phone Book or Group List.
SavePresetMsg. to save a part of the message as a preset message
OK
by selecting Start and End (left softkey) and pressing
. (This
option appears only on individual messages.) See "Message
Options" on page 165.
ᮣ
ᮣ
Information to display the sender's information.
ListMode toselectadisplayformat(1Line,2Lines, or3Lines per
message)forallthemessagelistsincludingInbox, Outbox, and
PictureMailInbox. (Thisoptionappearsonlyonthemessagelist.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
Erase to erase the message.
Memory to display the inbox memory status. (This option appears
only on the message list.)
Erasing Picture/Video Mail Messages
To erase incoming Picture/Video Mail messages:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Messaging and press
.
OK
3. Highlight PictureMail and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Erase and press
.
OK
5. Highlight AllMsgs., AllUnread, or AllRead and press
.
6. When a prompt appears, highlight Yes to erase or No to cancel
OK
and press
.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing the Picture Mail Website From Your Computer
Ⅵ
(You will first need to register through your PCS Phone to view
the Picture Mail Website; see “Creating Your Picture Mail
Password” on page 158.)
Fromthe Website, you cansharepicturesandvideo, editalbumtitles
andpicture/videocaptions, organizeandmoveimages, and muchmore.
Picture management tools are also available to improve or customize
your pictures. You'll be able to lighten, darken, crop, antique, add
comic bubbles and cartoon effects, and use other features to
transform your pictures.
Note: A monthly charge will apply for your use of Picture Mail services.
See your PCS Service Plan for details.
Tip: For complete details on using your phone's camera and camcorder and the
Picture Mail service, see Section 2J: Using Your Phone's Camera With
Camcorder beginning on page 109.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Messaging
Now you can send and receive email and text messages and
participate in Web-based chatrooms right from your PCS Phone.
Messaging allows you to stay connected to friends, family, and
co-workers 24 hours a day with always-on text capabilities anywhere
on the enhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.
Message Types
There are many types of text messaging available on your phone.
These include numeric messages (pages), Messages, Updates, and Mail.
(PCS Voicemail provides voicemail-to-mailbox messaging. For
information on using your phone’s voicemail feature, see
“Using Voicemail” on page 142.)
Accessing the Messaging Menu
MENU
To access the Messaging menu, press
press
, highlight Messaging, and
OK
OK
. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
Sendmessage to send Picture Mail (page 158), Video Mail (page
158), Text Message (page164), or Email for PCS Mail (page 173).
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
PictureMail to view incoming Picture/Video Mail (page 160).
TextMsg. to send and receive Text Messages (page 164).
Email to access PCS Mail (page 173).
Voicemail to access Voicemail (page 143).
Shortcut: From standby mode, select Messaging (right softkey) to access the
Messaging menu.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Text Messages
With Text Messages (or SMS messages), you can send text messages
from your PCS Vision Phone to up to ten recipients of messaging-
ready mobile phones and email addresses – and they can send
these services.
Sending a Text Message
To send a text message from your PCS Vision Phone:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Messaging and press
.
Shortcut: From standby mode, select Messaging (right softkey) to access the
Messaging menu.
OK
3. Highlight TextMsg. and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Sendmessage and press
.
5. To enter recipients to the Recipient List, highlight an option
OK
from the “Select address from” menu and press
.
ⅷ
PhoneBook to select recipients from your internal Phone
Book entries. (See “Selecting Recipients From Your Internal
Phone Book” on page 120.)
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
EnterMobile# to enter a recipient’s mobile phone number.
(You will be prompted to save it to your internal Phone Book.)
EnterEmail to enter a recipient’s email address. (You will be
prompted to save it to your internal Phone Book.)
GroupList to select recipients from your Group List. (See
“Selecting Recipients From Your Group List” on page 120.)
6. To add more recipients to the Recipient List, select Options (left
OK
softkey), highlight AddNewRecipient, and press
. You can
repeat step 5 above. To erase a recipient from the Recipient List,
highlight the recipient, select Options (left softkey), highlight
OK
Erase, and press
.
7. Select Next (right softkey) when you are finished
selecting/entering recipients. (You may include up to ten
recipients per message.)
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8. In the Message screen, use your keypad to enter a text message
(or press the left softkey to select from PresetMessages) and
OK
press
. (See “Entering Text” on page 26.)
9. In the Sending Options screen, you can select various options to
your message. (See “Message Options” below.)
10. To send the message, select Send (left softkey).
Note: If you attempt to send a text message in analog mode or no service, the
message cannot be sent and you will be prompted to confirm that you would like
to send the message when the digital service is available. Select Yes to save the
message as a Pending message to your outbox; select No to save the message
as a Canceled message.
MessageOptions
The Sending Options screen displays the following options for your
OK
message. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
EditRecipientList to add or change the recipients.
ᮣ
EditMessage to change your text message.
ᮣ
Priority to select the message priority Normal or Urgent.
ᮣ
InsertSignature to insert your signature that you preset (see
“Setting Up for the Messaging” on page 171).
ᮣ
CallbackNumber to select On (adding your default callback
number to the message) or Off. You may also edit it by selecting
Edit (right softkey) to apply only to the current message. (See
“Setting Up for the Messaging” on page 171.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
SaveMessage to save your message to your Outbox without
sending it. (This will exit the Messaging menu and return to
standby mode.)
SavetoPresetMsg. to save a part of your message as a preset
message. Use your navigation key to place the cursor where you
would like to begin saving the message, select Start (left softkey),
use your navigation key to highlight the section of the message
you want to save, select End (left softkey) when you're finished,
OK
and press
to save the selected passage.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New Message Notifications
There are several ways your PCS Vision Phone alerts you of incoming
Text messages:
ᮣ
By displaying a message on the screen.
ᮣ
By sounding the assigned ringer type.
ᮣ
By the LED blinking red.
ᮣ
By displaying
at the top of your screen. (This icon blinks for
an urgent message.)
Checking Incoming Text Messages
To check your inbox for incoming text messages:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Messaging and press
.
OK
3. Highlight TextMsg. and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Inbox and press
. (A list of messages will display.)
OK
5. Highlight the message you want to view and press
.
Icons
New message
Read message
Urgent New message
Urgent Read message
Locked message
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
InboxOptions
When the message list or an individual message is displayed in your
Inbox, select Options (right softkey) to display the following options.
OK
To select an option, highlight it and press
ᮣ
.
Go to go to the Web page specified by a URL from the message (if
available).
ᮣ
Call to display the sender’s phone number or ones contained in
the message (if available). To dial the number, select it and press
TALK
OK
or
.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
Reply to reply to the message (select ReplyNew or Replyw/Copy).
Forward to forward the message.
Lock/Unlock to lock or unlock the message. (Locked messages are
marked with
and prevented from automatic deleting.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
SavetoP-Book tosavephonenumbers, emailaddresses, andaURL
containedinthemessagetoyourinternalPhoneBookorGroupList.
SavePresetMsg. to save a part of the message as a preset message
OK
by selecting Start and End (left softkey) and pressing
. (This
option appears only on individual messages.) See “Message
Options” on page 165.
ᮣ
ᮣ
Information to display the sender’s information.
ListMode toselectadisplayformat(1Line,2Lines, or3Lines per
message)forallthemessagelistsincludingInbox, Outbox, and
PictureMailInbox. (Thisoptionappearsonlyonthemessagelist.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
Erase to erase the message.
Memory to display the inbox memory status. (This option appears
only on the message list.)
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reviewing Outgoing Text Messages
To display outgoing text messages stored in the Outbox:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Messaging and press
.
OK
3. Highlight TextMsg. and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Outbox and press
. (A list of messages will display.)
OK
5. Highlight the message you want to view and press
.
Icons
Message sent to the system
Message failed or canceled
Message pending (This will automatically be sent when the
digital service is available.)
Message saved as draft
Urgent message
Locked message
Message to multiple addresses
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OutboxOptions
When the message list or an individual message is displayed in your
Outbox, select Options (right softkey) to display the following
OK
options. To select an option, highlight it and press
ᮣ
.
Go to go to the Web page specified by a URL from the message (if
available).
ᮣ
Call to display the recipient’s phone number or ones contained in
the message (if available). To dial the number, select it and press
TALK
OK
or
.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
Forward to forward the message.
Edit to edit and send the message.
Send to send the message.
Lock/Unlock to lock or unlock the message. (Locked messages are
marked with
and prevented from automatic deleting.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ComposeNew to compose a new message.
Information to display information about the message.
ListMode toselectadisplayformat(1Line,2Lines, or3Lines per
message)forallthemessagelistsincludingInbox, Outbox, and
PictureMailInbox. (Thisoptionappearsonlyonthemessagelist.)
ᮣ
ᮣ
Erase to erase the message.
Memory to display the outbox memory status. (This option
appears only on the message list.)
ᮣ
StatusCode to display the time stamp and message ID. (This
option appears only on the individual message.)
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing All Text Message
s
To erase all text messages from your inbox and outbox
:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Messaging and press
.
OK
3. Highlight TextMsg. and press
.
OK
4. Highlight Erase and press
.
OK
5. Highlight Inbox, Outbox, or All and press
.
ⅷ
Inbox to select from further options (AllMsgs., AllUnread, or
AllRead) to erase text messages from the inbox.
ⅷ
ⅷ
Outbox to erase all text messages from the outbox.
All to erase all text messages from both inbox and outbox.
6. When a prompt appears, highlight Yes to erase or No to cancel
OK
and press
.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Up for Messaging
There are several messaging menu options available from your
phone's menus by selecting Settings and selecting Messaging. To
OK
select a menu option, highlight it and press
. These settings will
be applied to Text messages and Picture/Video Mail messages.
ᮣ
DisplayPop-up: Select On (to display new incoming
text/picture/video message content automatically) or Off.
ᮣ
SaveSentMessage: Select from AutoSave (to save all the outgoing
messages), Prompt (to prompt you to choose Yes or No for every
message), or DoNotSave (to save no message).
ᮣ
DefaultCallback#: Select On (to add your callback number to all the
outgoing messages) or Off. To enter or change the number, select
Edit (right softkey). You may select on or off for an individual
message (see “Message Options” on page 165).
ᮣ
EntryMode: Select the text entry mode abc or T9 that first appears
when entering a message.
ᮣ
Signature: Select On (to enable adding your signature to the
outgoing message) or Off. To edit the signature, select Edit (right
softkey).
ᮣ
DisplayFontSize: Select a font size Medium or Small for displaying
text/picture/video messages.
ᮣ
PresetMessages: Provides the messages that can be recalled when
entering text messages. There are two types of preset messages:
default and custom. You can view the default preset messages by
selecting View (right softkey). You can edit or erase custom
preset messages by highlighting an entry and selecting Edit (right
softkey) or Erase (left softkey).
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Signing Up for Updates
With Updates, you can have news and information sent directly to
your PCS Phone at the times you choose.
To select the information you want to send to your PCS Phone:
1. From your computer, log on to the Internet.
2. Go to the site from which you want to receive information. A
®
®
®,
few of the sites you can visit are America Online , Yahoo! , MSN
®
and eBay . (The location where you request updates within
each site will vary.)
3. Where indicated on the site, input your 10-digit PCS Phone
Number followed by “@messaging.sprintpcs.com.” For
Upon completing the registration process, you should begin
receiving updates on your PCS Phone as requested.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCS Mail
Using PCS Mail
With PCS Mail, you can perform many of the typical email functions
from your PCS Phone that you can from your personal computer.
You can manage your PCS Mail account from your PCS Phone or from
other select email providers from the Web through your PCS Mail.
Accessing PCS Mail Messages
To access PCS Mail messages:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Messaging and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Email and press
. (If you’re a first-time user, your
phone will prompt you to set up your PCS Mail account by
establishing a User Name and password.)
4. To view your messages, select Inbox.
5. Scroll to select the message you wish to read and press the left
softkey.
6. Once you’ve read a message, use the quick actions at the end of
each message (Reply, ReplyAll, Forward, Erase, and more).
Composing PCS Mail Messages
To compose a PCS Mail message:
1. From the PCS Mail menu (see steps 1-3 above), select
Compose.
2. Select the box under To and enter the recipient's email address.
3. Select the box under Subject: and enter the email subject.
4. Select the box under Message:, enter your email message, and
OK
press
.
OK
5. Highlight Send and press
to send the message.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCS Short Mail
Using PCS Short Mail
With PCS Short Mail, you can use a person’s wireless phone number
to send instant text messages from your PCS Vision Phone to their
messaging-ready phone – and they can send messages to you. When
you receive a new message, you’ll automatically be notified with a
one-way text message.
In addition, PCS Short Mail includes a variety of pre-set messages,
such as “I’m running late, I’m on my way,” that make composing
messages fast and easy. You can also customize your own pre-set
messages (up to 100 characters) from your PCS Phone.
To send a PCS Short Mail message:
1. Press the navigation key left (Web) to launch the Web.
(The PCS Vision Home page will display.)
2. Select Messaging.
3. Select ShortMail.
4. Select Compose.
OK
5. Select To and press
recipient and press
to display your Short List. Highlight a
to add the recipient.
OK
– or –
SelecttheboxafterTo, entertherecipient's10-digitmessaging-
OK
readywirelessphonenumber, andpress
toaddtherecipient.
Note: You must use the right softkey to select the 123 character input mode to
enter the recipient’s phone number.
6. Select Add (or add additional recipients and select Add).
7. Compose a message or use the pre-set messages or icons.
ⅷ
Totypeamessage, highlighttheMessage box, useyourkeypad
OK
totypeamessage, andpress
whenyouarefinished. (Use
therightsoftkeytoselectacharacterinputmode.)
ⅷ
To use a pre-set message or “emoticon,” highlight Insert and
select Pre-setMsgs or Icons. Select Go, then select the
message or emoticon you’d like to insert and select OK.
8. Review your message and select Send.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
174
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read a PCS Short Mail message:
1. When you receive a short mail, you will be notified by a message
on the screen.
2. Select Go (left softkey). The browser will launch.
3. Scroll to the new short mail message and press the left softkey.
Unread short mail messages will be marked with an asterisk (*).
Note: The last four digits from the PCS Phone Number of the person who sent you
a short mail message appear before the message text. If the sender is on your
short list, their nickname will appear instead of their number.
To reply to a PCS Short Mail message:
1. While the message is open, select Reply.
2. Compose your reply or use the pre-set messages or icons.
ⅷ
To type a reply, highlight the Message box, use your keypad
OK
to type a message, and press
when you are finished.
(Use the right softkey to select a character input mode.)
ⅷ
To use a pre-set message or “emoticon,” highlight Insert and
select Pre-setMsgs or Icons. Select Go, then select the
message or emoticon you’d like to insert and select OK.
3. Review your reply and select Send.
To add and/or edit Pre-Set Messages:
1. Press the navigation key left (Web) to launch the Web.
(The PCS Vision Home page will display.)
2. Select Messaging.
3. Select ShortMail.
4. Select Settings.
5. Select Pre-setMessages.
6. From the Pre-set Messages menu, select (AddNew) or the
message you wish to edit.
7. Enter your new message or changes and select Save.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chat
PCS Vision gives you the ability to join wireless chatrooms from your
PCS Phone. Send text messages and icons to chatroom participants
or launch a one-on-one (private) chatroom.
To access a chatroom from the browser:
1. Press the navigation key left (Web) to launch the Web.
(The PCS Vision Home page will display.)
2. Select Messaging.
3. Select Chat.
4. You will see a disclaimer for Wireless Chat. SelectAgree
(left softkey) to enter the Chat menu.
5. Select a chatroom from the menu (for example, “Friends”
or “Singles”).
OK
6. Use your keypad to enter a nickname, press
, and select
Enter (left softkey). Once in the chatroom, you may scroll
through the postings to read messages from other chatroom
participants.
Note: To avoid inadvertent data usage charges, you should log out of chatrooms
when you are ready to exit.
To post a message:
1. Select Addtext.
2. Enter your message.
3. Select Send.
To set up a private chatroom:
1. During an active chat session, select 1->1.
2. Select a chatter with whom you’d like to launch a private
OK
chatroom and press
. (A message will be sent to the other
party, inviting them to a 1-on-1 chat with you.)
To exit a chatroom:
Ⅵ
Select LeaveRoom.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Downloading Premium Services Content
With PCS Vision and your new PCS Vision Phone, you have access to a
dynamic variety of Premium Service content such as downloadable
Games, Ringers, and Screen Savers. While each type of download
involves a different file type, the basic method for accessing and
downloading files is the same.
AccessingtheDownloadMenus
To access the PCS Vision download menus:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Downloads and press
.
Shortcut: You can also press the navigation key down ( ) from standby mode
to access the Downloads menu.
3. Select the type of file you wish to download (Games, Ringers,
OK
ScreenSavers, Applications, orOthers) and press
.
OK
4. Select GetNew and press
. The browser will launch and
take you to the corresponding download menu.
To access the PCS Vision download menus from the Web browser:
Ⅵ
From the home page, select Downloads and then Games, Ringers,
ScreenSavers, or Applications to go to the corresponding
download menu. (For more information on navigating the Web,
see “Navigating the Web” on page 156.)
SelectinganItemtoDownload
From the download menus, items available for download may be
searched in a number of ways:
ᮣ
Featured displays a rotating selection of featured items.
ᮣ
BrowseCategory allows you to narrow your search to a general
category, such as Movie/TV Themes for Ringers or College Logos
for Screen Savers. (There may be several pages of available
content in a list. Select Next9 to view additional items.)
ᮣ
Search allows you to use your keypad to enter search criteria to
locate an item. You may enter an entire word or title or perform a
partial-word search (for example, entering “goo” returns “Good
Ol’ Boy,” “The Good, the Bad, and the Ugly,” and “Goofy - Club”).
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DownloadinganItem
Once you’ve decided on an item to download, highlight it and
OK
press
or select OK (left softkey). You will see a summary page for
the item including its title, the vendor, the download detail, the file
size, and the cost. Links allow you to view the LicenseDetails page,
which outlines the price, license type, and length of license for the
download, and the TermsofUse page, which details the Premium
Services Terms of Use and your responsibility for payment.
To download a selected item:
1. From the information page, select Buy (or GetIt in the case of a
free item). If you have not previously purchased an item, you
will be prompted to create your purchasing profile.
2. You will see a Confirmation screen confirming your purchase and
informing you that the charge will be added to your next
PCS Invoice. You will also be informed that the downloaded
item has been stored in the MyContentManager page.
3. Select Download to initiate the download of the item. (You
will see a series of browser screens, ending with the Download
screen, which lists the item name, vendor, version, size,
and type.)
4. Select Next (right softkey) to download the item.
5. You will see another series of screens detailing the download
initiation, progress (in kilobytes), and saving process. When the
Complete screen appears, the item has been successfully
downloaded to your phone.
6. From the Complete screen, following several options are
OK
available. Highlight an option and press
.
ⅷ
Use to view or play the downloaded item.
ⅷ
ⅷ
ⅷ
Shop to look for other items to download.
ContinueWeb to continue viewing the current Web page.
Exit to quit the browser and return to standby mode.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
178
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Games
You can play a variety of entertaining and graphically-rich games on
your PCS Phone. New games are easy to download and play.
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium
Services Content” on page 177.
DownloadingGames
To download a game to your phone:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Downloadsand press
.
OK
3. Highlight Games and press
.
OK
4. Highlight GetNew and press
. The browser will launch and
take you to the Games download menu.
5. Use your navigation key to highlight and select a game you wish
to download. (For more information on navigating the Web, see
“Navigating the Web” on page 156.)
6. From the item information page, select Buy. If you have not
previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to create
your purchasing profile.
7. A confirmation page will notify you that the Game has been
purchased and is stored in the MyContentManager folder. To
download the game, select Download.
8. From the Download screen, select Next (right softkey) to
download the game. When the Completed screen appears, the
game has been successfully downloaded to your phone.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
179
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PlayingGames
To play a downloaded game on your PCS Phone:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Downloadsand press
.
OK
3. Highlight Games and press
. (The Games screen will display.)
4. Highlight the game you wish to play and select Run (left softkey)
OK
or press
.
5. If applicable, a prompt will display the days remaining
on the game license and ask if you want to continue.
Select Yes.
6. Follow the onscreen instructions to play the game. When you
END
are finished, select Exit (or Quit) or press
.
7. Youwillbepromptedtoconfirm. SelectYes toexitorNo tocancel.
DownloadedGameOptions
From the Games screen, select Options (right softkey) to display
OK
several options. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
NetworkAccess to select a network access option (AlwaysAllow,
NeverAllow, or PromptInstance) for playing the game.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
Properties to display the game’s name, version, vendor, and more.
OnlineInfo to view more information on the Web.
Shop to download more games.
Erase to erase the game.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
180
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ringers
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium
Services Content” on page 177.
DownloadingRingers
To download an available ringer to your phone:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Downloadsand press
.
OK
3. Highlight Ringers and press
.
OK
4. Highlight GetNew and press
. The browser will launch and
take you to the Ringers download menu.
5. Use your navigation key to highlight and select a ringer you
wish to download. (For more information on navigating the
Web, see “Navigating the Web” on page 156.)
6. From the item information page, select Buy. If you have not
previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to create
your purchasing profile.
7. A confirmation page will notify you that the ringer has been
purchased and is stored in the MyContentManagerfolder. To
download the ringer, select Download.
8. From the Download screen, select Next (right softkey) to
download the ringer. When the Completed screen appears, the
ringer has been successfully downloaded to
your phone.
Note: You may store a limited number of downloaded ringers on your phone.
Additional downloads will be stored in your personal vault.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
181
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AssigningDownloadedRingers
Downloaded ringers may be assigned directly from the Downloads
menu and are also available through the
Settings menu.
To assign a downloaded ringer through the Settings menu, see
“Selecting Ringer Types for Voice Calls” on page 32 or “Selecting a
Ringer Type for Text/Picture Messages” on page 34.
To assign a downloaded ringer from the Downloads menu:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Downloadsand press
.
OK
3. HighlightRingers andpress
. (TheRingersscreenwilldisplay.)
OK
OK
4. Highlight a ringer and press
to play the ringer. (Press
to stop the playback.)
5. Select Assign (left softkey).
6. Highlight VoiceCalls, Voicemail, TextMsg/Pic. Mail, PhoneBook,
OK
or Time and press
. The following three items require an
extra step:
ⅷ
VoiceCalls to select a call type (WithCallerID, Restricted, No
CallerID, or Roaming).
ⅷ
ⅷ
PhoneBook to select your desired entry and select a phone
number or email address.
Time to select an option (Alarm, Countdown, or Scheduler).
Note: You may assign a ringer to more than one type of call.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
182
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DownloadedRingerOptions
From the Ringers screen, select Options (right softkey) to display
OK
several options. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
SetRinger to assign the ringer to the phone tasks.
ᮣ
Properties to display the ringer’s name, version, vendor, and more.
OnlineInfo to view more information on the Web.
Shop to download more ringers.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
Erase to erase the ringer.
PurchasingRingers
You can purchase ringers directly from your phone by following the
Note: Your personal vault saves items for up to 90 days. Once an item has been
downloaded to your phone, you may keep the file for as long as you like.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
183
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Screen Savers
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium
Services Content” on page 177.
DownloadingScreenSavers
To download an available Screen Saver to your phone:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Downloadsand press
.
OK
3. Highlight ScreenSavers and press
.
OK
4. Highlight GetNew and press
. The browser will launch and
take you to the Screen Savers download menu.
5. Use your navigation key to highlight and select a Screen Saver
you wish to download. (For more information on navigating the
Web, see “Navigating the Web” on page 156.)
6. From the item information page, select Buy. If you have not
previously purchased an item, you will be prompted to create
your purchasing profile.
7. A confirmation page will notify you that the Screen Saver has
been purchased and is stored in the MyContentManagerfolder.
To download the Screen Saver, select Download.
8. From the Download screen, select Next (right softkey) to
download the Screen Saver. When the Completed screen
appears, the Screen Saver has been successfully downloaded to
your phone.
Note: You may store a limited number of downloaded Screen Savers on your
phone, depending on the file sizes. Additional downloads will be stored in your
personal vault.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
184
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AssigningDownloadedScreenSavers
Downloaded Screen Savers may be assigned directly from
the Downloads menu and are also available through the
Settings menu.
To assign a downloaded Screen Saver through the Settings menu, see
“Changing the Screen Saver” on page 40.
To assign a downloaded Screen Saver from the Downloads menu:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Downloadsand press
.
OK
3. Highlight ScreenSavers and press
. (The Screen Savers
screen will display in thumbnail view.)
OK
Tip: To expand a Screen Saver, highlight it and press
. Press the navigation
BACK
key left or right to scroll through Screen Savers in full-screen. Press
return to thumbnail view.
to
4. Highlight a Screen Saver in thumbnail view and select Assign
(left softkey).
5. Highlight ScreenSaver, PhoneBook, Scheduler, SubLCD, Main
OK
Menu, or MyMenu and press
. The following four items
require an extra step:
ⅷ
ScreenSaver to select a display mode
(Always, Weekly, or SpecialDays).
ⅷ
ⅷ
PhoneBook to select your desired entry.
MainMenu to select a type of the Main Menu
(ThumbnailView or ListView).
ⅷ
MyMenu to select a type of the My Menu
(Thumbnail Viewor ListView).
Note: You may assign a Screen Saver to more than one task.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
185
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DownloadedScreenSaverOptions
From the Screen Savers screen, select Options (right softkey) to display
OK
several options. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
SetImage to assign the Screen Saver to the phone tasks.
ᮣ
Properties to display the Screen Saver’s name, version, vendor, and
more.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
OnlineInfo to view more information on the Web.
Shop to download more Screen Savers.
Erase to erase the Screen Saver.
ListVieworThumbnail Viewto switch the Screen Savers screen
between the list and thumbnail view.
PurchasingScreenSavers
You can purchase Screen Savers directly from your phone by
Note: Your personal vault saves items for up to 90 days. Once an item has been
downloaded to your phone, you may keep the file for as long as you like.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
186
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Applications
You can run a variety of applications on your PCS Phone. New
applications are easy to download and run.
Tip: For complete instructions on downloading, see “Downloading Premium
Services Content” on page 177.
DownloadingApplications
To download an available application:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Downloads and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Applications and press
.
OK
4. Highlight GetNew and press
. The browser will launch and
take you to the Applications download menu.
RunningApplications
To run a downloaded application on your PCS Phone:
MENU
1. Press
to access the main menu.
OK
2. Highlight Downloads and press
.
OK
3. Highlight Applications and press
. (The Applications screen
will display.)
4. Highlight the application you wish to run and select Run (left
OK
softkey) or press
.
DownloadedApplicationOptions
From the Applications screen, select Options (right softkey) to display
OK
several options. To select an option, highlight it and press
.
ᮣ
NetworkAccess to select a network access option (AlwaysAllow,
NeverAllow, or PromptInstance) for running the application.
ᮣ
Properties to display the application’s name, version, vendor, and
more.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
OnlineInfo to view more information on the Web.
Shop to download more applications.
Erase to erase the application.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
187
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Web
With Web on your PCS Vision Phone, you can browse full-color
graphic versions – not just text versions – of your favorite Websites,
making it easier than ever to stay informed while on the go. Check
sports scores, trade stocks, and shop on your PCS Phone anywhere
within the enhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.
In addition to the features already covered in this section, the
PCS Vision Home page offers always-on access to these colorful,
graphically rich Web categories. Many sites are available under more
than one menu – choose the one that's most convenient for you.
ᮣ
News: Get up-to-the-minute news regarding finance, business,
sports, and entertainment at sites like CNN, Bloomberg, USA
Today, and Forbes.
ᮣ
Weather: Access The Weather Channel to get current weather
conditions and forecasts.
ᮣ
Entertainment: Get the latest buzz on your favorite stars as well as
movie and music reviews at Websites like E! Online, Pocket
TM
BoxOffice , and TastNtalk.
ᮣ
Sports: Enjoy current news, statistics, and sports scores, as well as
updates of events in progress at ESPN.com and other sports sites.
ᮣ
Finance: Use Websites like Bloomberg, Fidelity, and Forbes to get
stock quotes, make trades, and check your bank account online.
ᮣ
Travel: Access flight information and make dining arrangements
from travel Websites like Saber and Fodors.
ᮣ
Shopping: Browse or purchase from popular shopping Websites
like Amazon.com or Edmunds.
ᮣ
Tools: Use tools like Switchboard to access yellow pages, white
pages – even reverse phone number look-up or use Google to
search for other Websites or images.
ᮣ
BusinessLinks: Access your PCS Business Connection Personal or
Enterprise Edition along with links to many business-related sites.
ᮣ
MyAccount: Check minutes and PCS Vision usage, view your
current invoice, or make a payment.
ᮣ
GoogleSearch: Launch a Google search in one of three classes:
PCS Web, Images, or Internet.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
188
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Browser Menu
Navigating the Web from your phone using the PCS Vision Home
Page is easy once you get the hang of it. For details on how to navigate
the Web, select menu items, and more, see “Navigating the Web” on
page 156.
Although the PCS Vision Home Page offers a broad and convenient
array of sites and services for you to browse, not all sites are
represented, and certain functionality, such as going directly to Web
sites and creating bookmarks is not available. For these and other
functions, you will need to use the browser menu. The browser
menu is a drop-down menu which offers additional functionality to
expand your use of the Web on your PCS Phone.
OpeningtheBrowserMenu
The browser menu may be opened anytime you have an active Vision
session, from any page you are viewing. To open the browser menu:
Ⅵ
Select Menu (right softkey).
The browser menu appears in the following several tabs that are
switched sequentially by pressing the navigation key left or right.
ᮣ
Navigate to select from basic options (see below).
ᮣ
Bookmarks to display the bookmarks you saved.
ᮣ
History to display URLs that you visited recently.
ᮣ
Tools to use useful tools for Web browsing.
ᮣ
Options to select from special functions (if applicable).
ᮣ
Input Textto select from T9, abc, 123, and more (if applicable).
ᮣ
Image to select an option for images (if applicable).
BrowserNavigateMenu
ᮣ
Home: Returns the browser to the PCS Vision Home page.
ᮣ
GoToURL: Allows you to navigate directly to a Website by entering
its URL (Website address).
ᮣ
Search: Launches a Google search.
ᮣ
MarkPage: Allows you to bookmark the current Web page.
ᮣ
Forward: Goes forward one page within the viewed pages.
ᮣ
Reload: Reloads the current Web page.
ᮣ
Advanced: Allows you to configure and manage your browser
settings.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
189
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CreatingaBookmark
Bookmarks allow you to store the address of your favorite Websites
for easy access at a later time.
To create a bookmark:
1. Go to the Web page you want to mark.
2. Access the browser menu by selecting Menu (right softkey).
3. Press the navigation key left or right to display the Navigate menu.
OK
4. Highlight MarkPage and select Select (left softkey) or press
.
(The bookmark title and URL are displayed.)
OK
5. Select Select (left softkey) or press
to save the bookmark.
Note: Bookmarking a page does not store the page contents, just
its address.
Note: Some pages cannot be bookmarked. Whether a particular Web page may
be marked is controlled by its creator.
AccessingaBookmark
To access a bookmark:
1. Access the browser menu by selecting Menu (right softkey).
2. PressthenavigationkeyleftorrighttodisplaytheBookmarks menu.
3. Highlight the bookmark you’d like to access and select Select
OK
(left softkey) or press
to go to the Website.
DeletingaBookmark
1. Access the browser menu by selecting Menu (right softkey).
2. PressthenavigationkeyleftorrighttodisplaytheBookmarks menu.
OK
3. Highlight More... and select Select (left softkey) or press
.
4. Highlight the bookmark you’d like to delete and select Select
OK
(left softkey) or press
.
5. Select Menu (right softkey) to display the Options menu.
OK
6. Highlight Delete and select Select (left softkey) or press
.
(You will be prompted to confirm.)
OK
7. Select OK (left softkey) or press
to delete the bookmark.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
190
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AssigningaHotkeyforaBookmark
Hotkeys allow you to access your favorite Websites by pressing and
holding digit keys (1 to 9).
To assign a hotkey for a bookmark:
1. Access the browser menu by selecting Menu (right softkey).
2. PressthenavigationkeyleftorrighttodisplaytheBookmarks menu.
OK
3. Highlight More... and select Select (left softkey) or press
.
4. Highlight the bookmark you'd like to assign a hotkey to and
select Menu (right softkey) to display the Options menu.
OK
5. Highlight Hotkeys and select Select (left softkey) or press
.
6. Highlight an empty entry (1 to 9) and select Assign (left softkey)
OK
or press
to save it.
To access a Website using a hotkey:
Ⅵ
During an active PCS Vision session, press and hold a digit key
(1 to 9) to access the Website.
GoingtoaSpecificWebsite
To go to a particular Website by entering a URL (Website address):
1. Access the browser menu by selecting Menu (right softkey).
2. Press the navigation key left or right to display the Navigate menu.
OK
3. Highlight GoToURL and select Select (left softkey) or press
.
4. Use your keypad to enter the URL of the Website you wish
to go to.
OK
5. Select Done (left softkey) or press
.
OK
6. Select Select (left softkey) or press
to go to the Website.
Note: Not all Websites are viewable on your phone.
ReloadingaWebPage
To reload (refresh) a Web page:
1. Access the browser menu by selecting Menu (right softkey).
2. Press the navigation key left or right to display the Navigate menu.
OK
3. Highlight Reload and select Select (left softkey) or press
.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
191
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RestartingtheWebBrowser
If the Web browser appears to be malfunctioning or stops
responding, you can usually fix the problem by simply restarting
the browser.
To restart your Web browser:
1. Access the browser menu by selecting Menu (right softkey).
2. Press the navigation key left or right to display the Navigate menu.
OK
3. Highlight Advanced and select Select (left softkey) or press
.
4. Highlight RestartBrowser and select Select (left softkey)
OK
or press
.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
192
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SM
PCS Business Connection
Personal Edition
SM
PCS Business Connection Personal Edition gives you secure,
®
®
®
real-time mobile access to your Microsoft Outlook or Lotus Notes
company email, calendar, business directory, and personal contacts.
You’ll have the features and functions of your Microsoft Outlook and
Lotus Notes so you can view, create, reply to, and delete email;
schedule appointments; and look up phone numbers in real time,
anywhere on the enhanced Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.
PCS Business Connection Personal Edition delivers the
following features:
ᮣ
Businessemailaccess: Read, reply to, forward, delete, and
compose your company email.
ᮣ
Companydirectoryandcontacts: Search, view, call, and email
contacts from your company's directory. Do all this and add/edit
your personal contacts.
ᮣ
Workcalendar: Accept and decline meetings, view daily
summaries and details, and navigate to various dates.
ᮣ
Files/informationonyourPC: Browse folders, download, and
view documents from any device using a PC browser or
Pocket Internet Explorer.
PCS Business Connection Personal Edition requires no hardware or
software installation on your company’s network. Just install the
PCS Business Connection Personal Edition software on your work
PC. This allows data to be securely retrieved in real-time by your
wireless device when connected to the enhanced Sprint Nationwide
PCS Network. There is a monthly charge for PCS Business
Connection and usage charges will also apply.
When your work PC isn't on, you can share connections with your
co-workers so that you always have access to your email, calendar,
and contacts. Your data remains secure behind the corporate firewall
and any changes you make on your wireless device are instantly
updated on your company server without the need to synchronize.
Additional PCS Business Connection solutions are available for your
Note: See your PCS Service Plan for PCS Business Connection billing details.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
193
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PCS Vision FAQs
HowwillIknowwhenmyphoneisreadyforPCSVisionservice?
in your phone's main menu: Settings > Information > PhoneInfo.
(When you have a PCS Vision connection.)
HowdoIsign-inforthefirsttime?
You are automatically signed in to access PCS Vision services when
you turn on your phone.
HowdoIknowwhenmyphoneisconnectedtoPCSVisionservices?
Your phone automatically connects when PCS Vision service is used
or an incoming message arrives. Your phone will also display the
icon. (Connecting takes about 10-12 seconds.)
CanImakecallsandusePCS Visionservicesatthesametime?
You cannot use voice and PCS Vision services simultaneously.
If you receive a call while PCS Vision service is active, the call will be
forwarded to voicemail. You can place an outgoing call anytime, but
it will interrupt any in-progress PCS Vision session.
Whenismydataconnectionactive?
Your connection is active when data is being transferred. Outgoing
calls are allowed; incoming calls go directly to voicemail. When
active, the
indicator flashes on your phone’s display screen.
Whenismydataconnectiondormant?
If no data is received for 10 seconds, the connection goes dormant.
When the connection is dormant, voice calls are allowed. (The
connection may become active again quickly.) If no data is received
for an extended period of time, the connection will terminate.
CanIsignoutofdataservices?
You can sign out without turning off your phone, however you will
not be able to browse the Web or use other PCS Vision services.
While signed out, you can still place or receive phone calls, check
voicemail, and use other voice services. You may sign in again at any
time. To sign out, go to Settings > PCSVision > DisablePCSVisionin
your phone’s menu.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3B: PCS Vision
194
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3C
SM
PCS Voice Command
In This Section
SM
ᮣ
GettingStartedwithPCSVoiceCommand
ᮣ
CreatingYourOwnAddressBook
ᮣ
MakingaCallwithPCSVoiceCommand
ith Sprint, the first wireless provider to offer innovative
WPCS Voice Command technology, reaching your friends, family,
and co-workers has never been easier – especially when you’re on the
go. Your voice does it all with PCS Voice Command.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3C: PCS Voice Command
195
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting Started With PCS Voice Command
With PCS Voice Command:
ᮣ
You can store all your contacts’ phone numbers, so you can
simply say the name of the person you want to call.
ᮣ
There’s no need to punch in a lot of numbers, memorize
voicemail passwords, or try to dial while you’re driving.
ᮣ
You can call anyone in your address book – even if you don’t
remember their phone number.
It’sEasytoGetStarted
TALK
Ⅵ
Just dial
from your PCS Phone to activate the service
and listen to brief instructions directly from your phone. There
is a monthly charge for PCS Voice Command.
Creating Your Own Address Book
You can program up to 500 names into your personal address book,
with each name having up to five phone numbers. That’s 2,500
phone numbers – and with the advanced technology of PCS Voice
Command – you can have instant access to all of them.
There are four ways to update your address book:
TALK
ᮣ
UseVoiceRecordings: Simply dial
and say, “Add name.”
You will then be asked to say the name and number you want to
add to your personal address book. Your address book can store
up to 20 voice recorded names at once.
ᮣ
ᮣ
functional Web-based address book to create and update
your contacts.
UseanExistingAddressBook: Automatically merge address books
SM
from desktop software applications with Sprint Sync Services for
no additional charge. Simply click on the “Click to synchronize”
button within your PCS Voice Command personal address book
ᮣ
CallDirectoryAssistance:If you don’t have a computer or Internet
access handy, you can have PCS Directory Assistance look up
phone numbers for you and automatically add them to your
address book. Just say “Call operator” and we’ll add two names
and numbers to your address book for our standard directory
assistance charge.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3C: PCS Voice Command
196
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Making a Call With PCS Voice Command
To place a call using PCS Voice Command:
1. Once you’ve signed up for PCS Voice Command and created
TALK
your address book, all you do is press
. You’ll hear a
tone followed by the prompt “Ready.”
2. After the “Ready” prompt, simply say, in a natural voice,
“Call” and the name of the person or the number you’d like to
call. For example, you can say, “Call Jane Smith at work,” “Call
John Baker on the mobile phone,” “Call 555-1234,” or
“Call Bob Miller.”
3. Your request will be repeated and you will be asked to verify.
Say “Yes” to call the number or person. Say “No” if you wish
to cancel.
4. The number will automatically be dialed. Keep in mind that
PCS Voice Command recognizes not only your voice, but any
voice, so that others can experience the same convenience if
they use your phone.
For more helpful hints on PCS Voice Command, including a list of
recognized commands and an interactive tutorial, visit
Note: PCS Voice Command is not available while roaming off the enhanced
Sprint Nationwide PCS Network.
Section 3: Using PCS Service Features
3C: PCS Voice Command
197
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4
Safety Guidelines and
Warranty Information
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4A
Safety
In This Section
ᮣ
Getting the Most Out of Your Reception
ᮣ
MaintainingSafeUseofandAccesstoYourPhone
ᮣ
CaringfortheBattery
ᮣ
Acknowledging Special Precautions and the FCC Notice
ᮣ
Consumer Information on Wireless Phones
art of getting the most out of your PCS Phone is learning how the
Pphone works and how to care for it. This section outlines
performance and safety guidelines that help you understand the basic
features of your phone’s operation.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
199
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting the Most Out of Your Reception
KeepingTabsonSignalStrength
The quality of each call you make or receive depends on the signal
strength in your area. Your phone informs you of the current signal
strength by displaying a number of bars next to the signal strength
icon. The more bars displayed, the stronger the signal. If you’re inside
a building, being near a window may give you better reception.
UnderstandingthePowerSaveFeature
If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a
Power Save feature is automatically activated. If your phone is active, it
periodically rechecks service availability or you can check it yourself
by pressing any key. Anytime the Power Save feature is activated, a
message displays on the screen. When a signal is found, your phone
returns to standby mode.
UnderstandingHowYourPhoneOperates
Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it’s
turned on, it receives and transmits radiofrequency (RF) signals.
When you use your phone, the system handling your call controls the
power level. This power can range from 0.01 µ watts to 0.2 watts in
digital mode.
KnowingRadiofrequencySafety
The design of your PCS Phone complies with updated NCRP
standards described below.
In 1991-92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in
updating ANSI’s 1982 standard for safety levels with respect to
human exposure to RF signals. More than 120 scientists, engineers
and physicians from universities, government health agencies and
industries developed this updated standard after reviewing the
available body of research. In 1993, the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In
August 1996, the FCC adopted hybrid standard consisting of the
existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the guidelines published by the
National Council of Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP).
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
200
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MaintainingYourPhone’sPeakPerformance
There are several simple guidelines to operating your phone properly
and maintaining safe, satisfactory service.
ᮣ
Hold the phone with the antenna raised, fully-extended, and over
your shoulder.
ᮣ
Try not to hold, bend, or twist the phone’s antenna.
ᮣ
Don’t use the phone if the antenna is damaged.
ᮣ
Speak directly into the mouthpiece.
ᮣ
Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid
spills. If your phone does get wet, immediately turn the power off
and remove the battery. If it’s inoperable, return it to a Sprint
SM
Store or call PCS Customer Solutions for service.
Note: For the best care of your phone, only Sprint authorized personnel should
service your phone and accessories. Faulty service may void
the warranty.
Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to
Your Phone
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY LEAD
TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE PROPERTY
DAMAGE
UsingYourPhoneWhileDriving
Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone
without a hands-free device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions.
Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that safety always
comes first.
When using your phone in the car:
ᮣ
Get to know your phone and its features, such as speed dial
and redial.
ᮣ
When available, use a hands-free device.
ᮣ
Position your phone within easy reach.
ᮣ
Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if
necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous
weather conditions.
ᮣ
Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
201
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ᮣ
ᮣ
ᮣ
Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when
stationary or before pulling into traffic.
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may
divert your attention from the road.
9
1
1
Dial
to report serious emergencies. It’s free from
your wireless phone.
ᮣ
ᮣ
Use your phone to help others in emergencies.
Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless
number when necessary.
Tip: Purchase an optional hands-free accessory at your local Sprint Store.
You may also call the PCS Accessory Hotline at 1-800-974-2221 or by
#
2
2
2
dialing
on your PCS Phone.
FollowingSafetyGuidelines
To operate your phone safely and efficiently, always follow
any special regulations in a given area. Turn your phone off in areas
where use is forbidden or when it may cause interference or danger.
UsingYourPhoneNearOtherElectronicDevices
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radiofrequency
(RF) signals. However, RF signals from wireless phones may affect
inadequately shielded electronic equipment.
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded
electronic operating systems and/or entertainment systems in motor
vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or their representative to
determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external RF
signals. Also check with the manufacturer regarding any equipment
that has been added to your vehicle.
Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as
pacemakers and hearing aids, to determine if they are adequately
shielded from external RF signals.
Note: Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request permission
before using the phone near medical equipment.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
202
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pacemakers
The Health Industry Manufacturers Association recommends that a
minimum separation of six (6”) inches be maintained between a
handheld wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential
interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are
consistent with the independent research by and recommendations
of Wireless Technology Research.
Persons with pacemakers:
ᮣ
Should ALWAYS keep the phone more than six (6”) inches from
their pacemaker when the phone is turned on.
ᮣ
Should not carry the phone in a breast pocket.
ᮣ
Should use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the
potential for interference.
ᮣ
If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place,
turn your phone off immediately.
TurningOffYourPhoneBeforeFlying
Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible
interference with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation
Administration (FAA) regulations require you to have permission
from a crew member to use your phone while the plane is on the
ground. To prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations prohibit
using your phone while the plane is in the air.
TurningOffYourPhoneinDangerousAreas
To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn off your phone
when in a blasting area or in other areas with signs indicating that
two-way radios should be turned off. Construction crews often use
remote-control RF devices to set off explosives.
Turn off your phone when you’re in any area that has a potentially
explosive atmosphere. Although it’s rare, your phone or its
accessories could generate sparks. Sparks could cause an explosion
or a fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. These areas are
often, but not always, clearly marked. They include:
ᮣ
Fueling areas such as gas stations.
ᮣ
Below deck on boats.
ᮣ
Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ᮣ
ᮣ
Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain,
dust, or metal powders.
Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off
your vehicle’s engine.
Note: Never transport or store flammable gas, liquid, or explosives in the
compartment of your vehicle that contains your phone or accessories.
ForVehiclesEquippedwithanAirBag
An air bag inflates with great force. DO NOT place objects, including
either installed or portable wireless equipment, in the area over the
air bag or in the air bag deployment area. If in-vehicle wireless
equipment is improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious
injury could result.
RestrictingChildren’sAccesstoyourPhone
Your PCS Phone is not a toy. Children should not be allowed to play
with it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the
phone or make calls that increase your phone bill.
CaringforYourPhone
ᮣ
Never attempt to disassemble the phone or any of its accessories.
If service or repair is required, return the unit to a Sprint
authorized service center. If the unit should be disassembled, a
risk of electric shock or fire may result.
ᮣ
Always use Sprint-approved accessories and optional devices
when operating this cellular phone, as the use of incompatible
auxiliary equipment could result in fire, electric shock or other
bodily injury. The use of unauthorized accessories will also void
your Warranty.
ᮣ
When the phone is used for extended periods of time in high
temperature conditions the phone surface could become hot.
Please use caution when touching the phone under such
conditions.
ᮣ
Use in Vehicles - Always secure the phone in its holder, when it is
not in use. Never place the phone on the passenger seat or
anyplace else in the car where it can become a projectile during a
collision or sudden stop.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
204
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ᮣ
Never expose this phone to high temperatures, such as those
found near a heater or in a closed car parked in the sun. This can
cause heat-damage to the plastic parts, the electronic
components and the battery.
ᮣ
ᮣ
Never drop this phone or subject it to violent impact or shock.
This can cause mechanical damage.
Never store this phone in cold areas. When the phone warms up
(to its normal operating temperature), moisture can form inside
the phone, which may damage the phone’s electronic circuit
board.
ᮣ
Never use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong
detergents to clean this phone. Always clean it with a soft cloth
that has been slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water
solution.
ᮣ
ᮣ
Never paint this phone. This can clog the moving parts.
If you at anytime notice an allergic skin reaction from use of this
product, immediately discontinue use and consult with your
physician.
ᮣ
ᮣ
Do not aim your camera at the sun. The sunlight passing through
the camera lens may cause damage to the camera.
Do not use your camera's flash close to a person's eyes. This may
cause the person to lose eyesight temporarily and result in an
accident.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
205
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caring for the Battery
ProtectingYourBattery
The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your
battery’s performance.
ᮣ
Use only Sprint-approved batteries and desktop chargers.
These chargers are designed to maximize battery life. Using
other batteries or chargers voids your warranty and may
cause damage.
ᮣ
In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures
that range from 32º F to 113º F (0º C to 45º C).
ᮣ
Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high
humidity areas, such as the bathroom.
ᮣ
Never dispose of the battery by incineration.
ᮣ
Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean.
ᮣ
Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery.
ᮣ
The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long
period of time.
ᮣ
It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides
acceptable performance. It can be recharged hundreds of times
before it needs replacing.
ᮣ
Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods
of time. It’s best to follow these storage rules:
Less than one month:
-4º F to 140º F (-20º C to 60º C)
More than one month:
-4º F to 113º F (-20º C to 45º C)
ᮣ
Never expose the terminals of the battery pack to any other metal
object. Always wrap it or place it in a plastic bag, whenever
transporting it.
ᮣ
Never heat and never attempt to disassemble the battery pack, as
that could cause leakage of the caustic electrolyte. If the battery is
accidentally broken, avoid skin contact with the contents. In the
event of skin contact, wash the affected area immediately and
obtain prompt medical attention.
ᮣ
Always turn your phone OFF before removing the battery pack,
and always use the battery pack for its intended purpose only.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
206
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DisposalofLithiumIon(LiIon)Batteries
For safe disposal options of your LiIon batteries, contact your nearest
Sprint-authorized service center.
SpecialNote:Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In some
areas, the disposal of batteries in household or business trash may
be prohibited.
Note:For safety, do not handle a damaged or leaking LiIon battery.
Maintaining Safe Use of the Travel Charger
The travel charger and the desktop charger that were designed for
this unit both require the use of a standard 120 V AC power source for
their operation.
ᮣ
Never attempt to disassemble or repair a travel charger or desktop
charger, as exposure to electric shock hazards may result. Always
contact a Sprint authorized service center if repair or
replacement is required.
ᮣ
Never alter the AC cord or plug on your travel charger or desktop
charger. If the plug will not fit into the available outlet, have a
proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Improper
connection can result in the risk of electric shock.
ᮣ
Never allow any liquids or water to spill on the travel charger or
desktop charger when it is connected to an AC power source.
There is a risk of fire or electric shock.
ᮣ
Always use the Sprint-approved travel charger or desktop charger
to avoid any risk of fire or damage to your cellular phone or
battery. Bodily injury or property damage may occur as a result of
the use of an unauthorized and incompatible travel charger or
desktop charger.
ᮣ
Never use a travel charger or desktop charger if it has a damaged
or worn power cord or plug. The use of damaged or worn power
cords or plugs could result in electric shock, burns or fire.
Contact a Sprint-authorized service center immediately to obtain
a suitable replacement.
ᮣ
Always unplug the travel charger or desktop charger from the
power source before attempting any cleaning in order to avoid
the risk of electric shock. Always use a soft cloth dampened with
water to clean the equipment, after it has been unplugged.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
207
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ᮣ
Never attempt to use an unauthorized travel charger or desktop
charger with your phone in order to avoid any risk of bodily injury
or property damage. Since unauthorized accessories have different
specifications, they may be incompatible with your phone.
ᮣ
Always confirm that the power cord for any accessory is located
so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or otherwise
subjected to damage or stress.
ᮣ
ᮣ
Never place heavy objects on a power cord, as this could result in
damage to the cord.
Never bend or twist a power cord, and never pull on a power
cord in an attempt to remove a travel charger or accessory plug
from a socket. Always grasp the travel charger or the accessory
plug directly when unplugging the device in order to avoid
damaging the cord.
ᮣ
Always disconnect the travel charger or desktop charger from the
power source when it is not in use.
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product or cords associated
with accessories sold with this product, will expose you to lead, a
chemical known to the State of California to cause birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Washhandsafterhandling.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
208
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Acknowledging Special Precautions
and the FCC Notice
FCC Notice
The phone may cause TV or radio interference if used in close
proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can require you to stop
using the phone if such interference cannot be eliminated.
Vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane)
must comply with the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58).
For a copy of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection
Association, One Batterymarch Park, Quincy, MA 02269, Attn:
Publication Sales Division.
Cautions
Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly approved
in this document could void your warranty for this equipment, and
void your authority to operate this equipment. Only use approved
batteries, antennas and chargers. The use of any unauthorized
accessories may be dangerous and void the phone warranty if said
accessories cause damage or a defect to the phone.
Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending or
sitting on it.
Body-WornOperation
To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you
wear a handset on your body, use the Sprint supplied or approved
carrying case, holster or other body-worn accessory. If you do not
use a body-worn accessory, ensure that the antenna is at least 0.6 inch
(1.5 centimeters) from your body when transmitting. Use of non-
Sprint approved accessories may violate FCC RF exposure guidelines.
For more information about RF exposure, please visit the FCC Website
at www.fcc.gov
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
209
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SpecificAbsorptionRates(SAR)forWirelessPhones
The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF
energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset.
The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing,
measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how much
RF the phone emits. All phone models are tested at their highest
value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the SAR of a
phone can be substantially less than the level reported to the FCC.
This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity to a base
station antenna, phone design and other factors. What is important
to remember is that each phone meets strict federal guidelines.
Variations in SARs do not represent a variation in safety.
All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a
substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values
between different model phones do not mean variations in safety.
SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are
considered safe for use by the public.
The highest reported SAR values of the VM4050 are:
AMPS mode (Part 22) - Head:0.855 W/kg; Body-worn: 0.922 W/kg
PCS mode (Part 24) - Head: 0.726 W/kg; Body-worn: 0.585 W/kg
FCCRadiofrequencyEmission
This phone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Exposure Guidelines.
FCC ID number: CJ6DCFC009001. More information on the phone's
SAR can be found from the following FCC Website:
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
210
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emergency Calls
Never rely solely upon your wireless phone for essential
communications (e.g. medical emergencies), if it can be avoided,
since a wireless phone requires a complex combination of radio
signals, relay stations, and landline networks for its operation.
Consequently, emergency calls may not always be possible under all
conditions on all wireless phone systems.
Your wireless phone, however, may sometimes be the only available
means of communication at the scene of an accident. When making
an emergency call, always give the recipient all necessary
information as accurately as possible. Never terminate an emergency
call until you have received clearance to do so.
FCCEnhanced911(E911)RulesBackground
The Federal Communications Commission (FCC) requires wireless
carriers to transmit specific latitude and longitude location
(Automatic Location Identification = ALI) information as well as
“911” calls to Public Safety Answering Points (PSAPs) to identify the
location of the caller in case of emergency. Accuracy requirement for
ALI information by FCC E911 rules is within 50 meters for 67 percent
of calls and within 150 meters for 95 percent of calls (FCC's ALI
Requirements).
YourPhone'sALICapability
This phone is an ALI-capable phone equipped with the GPS (Global
Positioning System: Satellite assisted location information system)
receiver supporting GPS based ALI-capable network to comply with
the FCC's ALI requirements.
The network compliance with the above FCC requirements is
dependent on: (a) the use of digital technology by the wireless
network; (b) GPS satellite signals being able to reach the handset
(such transmissions do not always work indoors, for example) ; and
(c) handset signals reaching wireless “base stations” (atmospheric
and environmental conditions may cause variations in handset
receiving signal strength).
Also, the transmission of the ALI information is subject, in part, to
system constraints within the wireless network to which the E911
signal is transmitted and over which Audiovox has no control.
Finally, customers are advised that the phone's ALI capability is to be
used for E911 purposes only.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
211
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consumer Information on Wireless Phones
(The following information comes from a consumer information
Web site jointly sponsored by the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
(FDA) and the Federal Communications Commission (FCC), entitled
“Cell Phone Facts: Consumer Information on Wireless Phones.” The
information reproduced herein is dated April 3, 2002. For further
1. Whatisradiofrequencyenergy(RF)?
Radiofrequency (RF) energy is another name for radio waves. It is one
form of electromagnetic energy that makes up the electromagnetic
spectrum. Some of the other forms of energy in the electromagnetic
spectrum are gamma rays, x-rays and light. Electromagnetic energy
(or electromagnetic radiation) consists of waves of electric and
magnetic energy moving together (radiating) through space. The
area where these waves are found is called an electromagnetic field.
Radio waves are created due to the movement of electrical charges in
antennas. As they are created, these waves radiate away from the
antenna. All electromagnetic waves travel at the speed of light. The
major differences between the different types of waves are the
distances covered by one cycle of the wave and the number of waves
that pass a certain point during a set time period. The wavelength is
the distance covered by one cycle of a wave. The frequency is the
number of waves passing a given point in one second. For any
electromagnetic wave, the wavelength multiplied by the frequency
equals the speed of light. The frequency of an RF signal is usually
expressed in units called hertz (Hz). One Hz equals one wave per
second. One kilohertz (kHz) equals one thousand waves per second,
one megahertz (MHz) equals one million waves per second, and one
gigahertz (GHz) equals one billion waves per second.
RF energy includes waves with frequencies ranging from about 3000
waves per second (3 kHz) to 300 billion waves per second (300 GHz).
Microwaves are a subset of radio waves that have frequencies ranging
from around 300 million waves per second (300 MHz) to three billion
waves per second (3 GHz).
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
212
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Howisradiofrequencyenergyused?
Probably the most important use of RF energy is for
telecommunications. Radio and TV broadcasting, wireless phones,
pagers, cordless phones, police and fire department radios, point-to-
point links and satellite communications all rely on RF energy.
Other uses of RF energy include microwave ovens, radar, industrial
heaters and sealers, and medical treatments. RF energy, especially at
microwave frequencies, can heat water. Since most food has a high
water content, microwaves can cook food quickly. Radar relies on RF
energy to track cars and airplanes as well as for military applications.
Industrial heaters and sealers use RF energy to mold plastic materials,
glue wood products, seal leather items such as shoes and
pocketbooks, and process food. Medical uses of RF energy include
pacemaker monitoring and programming.
3. Howisradiofrequencyradiationmeasured?
RF waves and RF fields have both electrical and magnetic
components. It is often convenient to express the strength of the RF
field in terms of each component. For example, the unit “volts per
meter” (V/m) is used to measure the electric field strength, and the
unit “amperes per meter” (A/m) is used to express the magnetic field
strength. Another common way to characterize an RF field is by
means of the power density. Power density is defined as power per
unit area. For example, power density can be expressed in terms of
milliwatts (one thousandth of a watt) per square centimeter
(mW/cm2 or microwatts (one millionth of a watt) per square
centimeter (µW/cm2).
The quantity used to measure how much RF energy is actually
absorbed by the body is called the Specific Absorption Rate or SAR.
The SAR is a measure of the rate of absorption of RF energy. It is
usually expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg) or milliwatts
per gram (mW/g).
4. WhatbiologicaleffectscanbecausedbyRFenergy?
The biological effects of radiofrequency energy should not be
confused with the effects from other types of electromagnetic
energy.
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found in X-rays
and gamma rays can ionize biological tissues. Ionization is a process
where electrons are stripped away from their normal locations in
atoms and molecules. It can permanently damage biological tissues
including DNA, the genetic material. Ionization only occurs with
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
213
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
very high levels of electromagnetic energy such as X-rays and gamma
rays. Often the term radiation is used when discussing ionizing
radiation (such as that associated with nuclear power plants).
The energy levels associated with radiofrequency energy, including
both radio waves and microwaves, are not great enough to cause the
ionization of atoms and molecules. Therefore, RF energy is a type of
non-ionizing radiation. Other types of non-ionizing radiation include
visible light, infrared radiation (heat) and other forms of
electromagnetic radiation with relatively low frequencies.
Large amounts of RF energy can heat tissue. This can damage tissues
and increase body temperatures. Two areas of the body, the eyes and
the testes, are particularly vulnerable to RF heating because there is
relatively little blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.
The amount of RF radiation routinely encountered by the general
public is too low to produce significant heating or increased body
temperature. Still, some people have questions about the possible
health effects of low levels of RF energy. It is generally agreed that
further research is needed to determine what effects actually occur
and whether they are dangerous to people. In the meantime,
standards-setting organizations and government agencies are
continuing to monitor the latest scientific findings to determine
whether changes in safety limits are needed to protect human health.
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public
health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO
to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF
biological effects.
5. WhatlevelsofRFenergyareconsideredsafe?
Various organizations and countries have developed standards for
exposure to radiofrequency energy. These standards recommend
safe levels of exposure for both the general public and for workers. In
the United States, the FCC has used safety guidelines for RF
environmental exposure since 1985.
The FCC guidelines for human exposure to RF electromagnetic fields
are derived from the recommendations of two expert organizations,
the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements
(NCRP) and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed by
scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry, government,
and academia after extensive reviews of the scientific literature
related to the biological effects of RF energy.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
214
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Many countries in Europe and elsewhere use exposure guidelines
developed by the International Commission on Non-Ionizing
Radiation Protection (ICNIRP). The ICNIRP safety limits are generally
similar to those of the NCRP and IEEE, with a few exceptions. For
example, ICNIRP recommends different exposure levels in the lower
and upper frequency ranges and for localized exposure from certain
products such as hand-held wireless telephones. Currently, the
World Health Organization is working to provide a framework for
international harmonization of RF safety standards.
The NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP all have identified a whole-body Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR) value of 4 watts per kilogram (4 W/kg) as a
threshold level of exposure at which harmful biological effects may
occur. Exposure guidelines in terms of field strength, power density
and localized SAR were then derived from this threshold value. In
addition, the NCRP, IEEE, and ICNIRP guidelines vary depending on
the frequency of the RF exposure. This is due to the finding that
whole-body human absorption of RF energy varies with the
frequency of the RF signal. The most restrictive limits on whole-body
exposure are in the frequency range of 30-300 MHz where the human
body absorbs RF energy most efficiently. For products that only
expose part of the body, such as wireless phones, exposure limits in
terms of SAR only are specified.
The exposure limits used by the FCC are expressed in terms of SAR,
electric and magnetic field strength, and power density for
transmitters operating at frequencies from 300 kHz to 100 GHz. The
specific values can be found in two FCC bulletins, OET Bulletins 56
6. WhyhastheFCCadoptedguidelinesforRFexposure?
The FCC authorizes and licenses products, transmitters, and facilities
that generate RF and microwave radiation. It has jurisdiction over all
transmitting services in the U.S. except those specifically operated by
the Federal Government. While the FCC does not have the expertise
to determine radiation exposure guidelines on its own, it does have
the expertise and authority to recognize and adopt technically sound
standards promulgated by other expert agencies and organizations,
and has done so . (Our joint efforts with the FDA in developing this
website is illustrative of the kind of inter-agency efforts and
consultation we engage in regarding this health and safety issue.)
Under the National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (NEPA), the
FCC has certain responsibilities to consider whether its actions will
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
215
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
significantly affect the quality of the human environment. Therefore,
FCC approval and licensing of transmitters and facilities must be
evaluated for significant impact on the environment. Human
exposure to RF radiation emitted by FCC-regulated transmitters is
one of several factors that must be considered in such environmental
evaluations. In 1996, the FCC revised its guidelines for RF exposure
as a result of a multi-year proceeding and as required by the
Telecommunications Act of 1996.
Radio and television broadcast stations, satellite-earth stations,
experimental radio stations and certain wireless communication
facilities are required to undergo routine evaluation for RF
compliance when they submit an application to the FCC for
construction or modification of a transmitting facility or renewal of a
license. Failure to comply with the FCC's RF exposure guidelines
could lead to the preparation of a formal Environmental Assessment,
possible Environmental Impact Statement and eventual rejection of
an application. Technical guidelines for evaluating compliance with
the FCC RF safety requirements can be found in the FCC's OET
Bulletin 65. http://www.fcc.gov/oet/info/documents/bulletins/#65
Low-powered, intermittent, or inaccessible RF transmitters and
facilities are normally excluded from the requirement for routine
evaluation for RF exposure. These exclusions are based on standard
calculations and measurement data indicating that a transmitting
station or equipment operating under the conditions prescribed is
unlikely to cause exposures in excess of the guidelines under normal
conditions of use. Such exclusions are not exclusions from
compliance, but, rather, exclusions from routine evaluation. The
FCC's policies on RF exposure and categorical exclusion can be
found in Section 1.1307(b) of the FCC's Rules and Regulations [(47
CFR 1.1307(b)].
7. HowcanIobtaintheSpecificAbsorptionRate(SAR)valueformy
wirelessphone?
The FCC requires that wireless phones sold in the United States
demonstrate compliance with human exposure limits adopted by the
FCC in 1996. The relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head
of a wireless telephone-user is given by the Specific Absorption Rate
(SAR), as explained above. The FCC requires wireless phones to
comply with a safety limit of 1.6 watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg) in
terms of SAR.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
216
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Information on SAR for a specific phone model can be obtained for
many recently manufactured phones using the FCC identification
(ID) number for that model. The FCC ID number is usually printed
somewhere on the case of the phone. Sometimes it may be necessary
to remove the battery pack to find the number. Once you have the ID
this page, you will see instructions for entering the FCC ID number.
Type the FCC ID number exactly as requested (the Grantee Code is
the first three characters, the Equipment Product Code is the rest of
the FCC ID number). Then click on “Start Search.” The “Grant of
Equipment Authorization” for your telephone should appear. Read
through the grant for the section on “SAR Compliance,”
“Certification of Compliance with FCC Rules for RF Exposure” or
similar language. This section should contain the value(s) for typical
or maximum SAR for your phone.
Phones and other products authorized since June 2, 2000, should
have the maximum SAR levels noted directly on the “Grant of
Equipment Authorization.” For phones and products authorized
between about mid-1998 and June 2000, detailed information on SAR
levels is typically found in the exhibits associated with the grant.
Once a grant is accessed, the exhibits can be viewed by clicking on
“View Exhibit.” Grants authorized prior to 1998 are not part of the
electronic database but, rather, have been documented in the form of
paper records.
The FCC database does not list phones by model number. However,
consumers may find SAR information from other sources as well.
Some wireless phone manufacturers make SAR information available
on their own Web sites. In addition, some non-government Web sites
provide SARs for specific models of wireless phones. However, the
FCC has not reviewed these sites and makes no guarantees of their
accuracy. Finally, phones certified by the Cellular
Telecommunications and Internet Association (CTIA) are required to
provide SAR information to consumers in the instructional materials
that come with the phones.
8. Dohands-freekitsforwirelessphonesreducerisksfromexposureto
RFemissions?
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from
wireless phones, there is no reason to believe that hands-free kits
reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used with wireless phones for
convenience and comfort. These systems reduce the absorption of
RF energy in the head because the phone, which is the source of the
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
217
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RF emissions, will not be placed against the head. On the other hand,
if the phone is mounted against the waist or other part of the body
during use, then that part of the body will absorb more RF energy.
Wireless phones marketed in the U.S. are required to meet safety
requirements regardless of whether they are used against the head or
against the body. Either configuration should result in compliance
with the safety limit.
9. DowirelessphoneaccessoriesthatclaimtoshieldtheheadfromRF
radiationwork?
Since there are no known risks from exposure to RF emissions from
wireless phones, there is no reason to believe that accessories that
claim to shield the head from those emissions reduce risks. Some
products that claim to shield the user from RF absorption use special
phone cases, while others involve nothing more than a metallic
accessory attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these
products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike “hand-free”
kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere with proper operation of
the phone. The phone may be forced to boost its power to
compensate, leading to an increase in RF absorption. In February
2002, the Federal trade Commission (FTC) charged two companies
that sold devices that claimed to protect wireless phone users from
radiation with making false and unsubstantiated claims. According to
FTC, these defendants lacked a reasonable basis to substantiate their
claim.
10. Whatarewirelesstelephonebasestations?
Fixed antennas used for wireless telecommunications are referred to
as cellular base stations, cell stations, PCS (“Personal
Communications Service”) stations or telephone transmission
towers. These base stations consist of antennas and electronic
equipment. Because the antennas need to be high in the air,
they are often located on towers, poles, water tanks, or rooftops.
Typical heights for freestanding base station towers are
50-200 feet.
Some base stations use antennas that look like poles, 10 to 15 feet in
length, that are referred to as “omni-directional” antennas. These
types of antennas are usually found in rural areas. In urban and
suburban areas, wireless providers now more commonly use panel
or sector antennas for their base stations. These antennas consist of
rectangular panels, about 1 by 4 feet in dimension. The antennas are
usually arranged in three groups of three antennas each. One antenna
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
218
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
in each group is used to transmit signals to wireless phones, and the
other two antennas in each group are used to receive signals from
wireless phones.
At any base station site, the amount of RF energy produced depends
on the number of radio channels (transmitters) per antenna and the
power of each transmitter. Typically, 21 channels per antenna sector
are available. For a typical cell site using sector antennas, each of the
three transmitting antennas could be connected to up to 21
transmitters for a total of 63 transmitters. However, it is unlikely that
all of the transmitters would be transmitting at the same time. When
omni-directional antennas are used, a cellular base station could
theoretically use up to 96 transmitters, but this would be very
unusual, and, once again, it is unlikely that all transmitters would be
in operation simultaneously. Base stations used for PCS
communications generally require fewer transmitters than those
used for cellular radio transmissions, since PCS carriers usually have a
higher density of base station antenna sites.
11. Arewirelesstelephonebasestationssafe?
The electromagnetic RF signals transmitted from base station
antennas stations travel toward the horizon in relatively narrow
paths. For example, the radiation pattern for an antenna array
mounted on a tower can be likened to a thin pancake centered
around the antenna system. The individual pattern for a single array
of sector antennas is wedge-shaped, like a piece of pie. As with all
forms of electromagnetic energy, the power decreases rapidly as one
moves away from the antenna. Therefore, RF exposure on the ground
is much less than exposure very close to the antenna and in the path
of the transmitted radio signal. In fact, ground-level exposure from
such antennas is typically thousands of times less than the exposure
levels recommended as safe by expert organizations. So exposure to
nearby residents would be well within safety margins.
Cellular and PCS base stations in the United States are required to
comply with limits for exposure recommended by expert
organizations and endorsed by government agencies responsible for
health and safety. Measurements made near cellular and PCS base
station antennas mounted on towers have confirmed that ground-
level exposures are typically thousands of times less than the
exposure limits adopted by the FCC. In fact, in order to be exposed to
levels at or near the FCC limits for cellular or PCS frequencies an
individual would essentially have to remain in the main transmitted
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
219
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
radio signal (at the height of the antenna) and within a few feet from
the antenna. This is, of course, very unlikely to occur.
When cellular and PCS antennas are mounted on rooftops, RF levels
on that roof or on others near by would probably be greater than
those typically encountered on the ground. However, exposure
levels approaching or exceeding safety guidelines should be
encountered only very close to or directly in front of the antennas. In
addition, for sector-type antennas, typically used for such rooftop
base stations, RF levels to the side and in back of these antennas are
insignificant. General guidelines on antenna installations and
circumstances that might give rise to a concern about an facility's
conformance with FCC regulations can be found in A Local
Government Official's Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF Emission
Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be
12. Whoregulatesexposuretoradiationfrommicrowaveovens, television
setsandcomputermonitors?
The Food and Drug Administration is responsible for protecting the
public from harmful radiation emissions from these consumer
products.
13. DoestheFCCroutinelymonitorradiofrequencyradiationfrom
antennas?
The FCC does not have the resources or the personnel to routinely
monitor the emissions for all the thousands of transmitters that are
subject to FCC jurisdiction. However, the FCC does have
measurement instrumentation for evaluating RF levels in areas that
may be accessible to the public or to workers. If there is evidence for
potential non-compliance with FCC exposure guidelines for a FCC-
regulated facility, staff from the FCC's Office of Engineering and
Technology or the FCC Enforcement Bureau can conduct and
investigation, and, if appropriate, perform actual measurements.
Circumstances that could give rise to a concern about an facility's
conformance with FCC regulations can be found in in A Local
Government Official's Guide to Transmitting Antenna RF Emission
Safety: Rules, Procedures, and Practical Guidance. This Guide can be
problems should be brought to the FCC's attention by contacting the
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
220
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14. DoestheFCCmaintainadatabasethatincludesinformationonthe
locationandtechnicalparametersofallthetransmittingtowers
itregulates?
Each of the FCC Bureaus maintains its own licensing database system
for the service(s) it regulates (e.g., television, cellular service,
satellite earth stations). The FCC issues two types of licenses: site
specific and market based. In the case of site specific licensed
facilities, technical operating information is collected from the
licensee as part of the licensing process. However, in the case of
market based licensing (e.g., PCS, cellular), the licensee is granted
the authority to operate a radio communications system in a
geographic area using as many facilities as are required, and the
licensee is not required to provide the FCC with specific location and
operating parameters of these facilities.
Information on site specific licensed facilities can be found the
“General Menu Reports” (GenMen) at
The various FCC Bureaus also publish on at least a weekly basis, bulk
extracts of their licensing databases. Each licensing database has its
own unique file structure. These extracts consist of multiple, very
large files. The FCC's Office of Engineering and Technology (OET)
maintains an index to these databases at
various databases include frequency, state/county,
latitude/longitude, call-sign and licensee name. For further
information on the Commission's existing databases, you can contact
15. CanlocalandstategovernmentalbodiesestablishlimitsforRF
exposure?
Although some local and state governments have enacted rules and
regulations about human exposure to RF energy in the past, the
Telecommunications Act of 1996 requires the Federal Government
to control human exposure to RF emissions. In particular, Section
704 of the Act states that, “No State or local government or
instrumentality thereof may regulate the placement, construction,
and modification of personal wireless service facilities on the basis of
the environmental effects of radio frequency emissions to the extent
that such facilities comply with the Commission's regulations
concerning such emissions.” Further information on federal
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
221
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
authority and FCC policy is available in a fact sheet from the FCC's
16. Dowirelessphonesposeahealthhazard?
The available scientific evidence does not show that any health
problems are associated with using wireless phones. There is no
proof, however, that wireless phones are absolutely safe. Wireless
phones emit low levels of radiofrequency energy (RF) in the
microwave range while being used. They also emit very low levels of
RF when in the stand-by mode. Whereas high levels of RF can
produce health effects (by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF
that does not produce heating effects causes no known adverse
health effects. Many studies of low level RF exposures have not found
any biological effects. Some studies have suggested that some
biological effects may occur, but such findings have not been
confirmed by additional research. In some cases, other researchers
have had difficulty in reproducing those studies, or in determining
the reasons for inconsistent results.
17. WhatisFDA'sroleconcerningthesafetyofwirelessphones?
Under the law, FDA does not review the safety of radiation-emitting
consumer products such as wireless phones before they can be sold,
as it does with new drugs or medical devices. However, the agency
has authority to take action if wireless phones are shown to emit
radiofrequency energy (RF) at a level that is hazardous to the user. In
such a case, FDA could require the manufacturers of wireless phones
to notify users of the health hazard and to repair, replace or recall the
phones so that the hazard no longer exists.
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA regulatory
actions, FDA has urged the wireless phone industry to take a number
of steps, including the following:
ᮣ
Support needed research into possible biological effects of RF of
the type emitted by wireless phones;
ᮣ
Design wireless phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure
to the user that is not necessary for device function; and
ᮣ
Cooperate in providing users of wireless phones with the best
possible information on possible effects of wireless phone use on
human health
FDA belongs to an interagency working group of the federal agencies
that have responsibility for different aspects of RF safety to ensure
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
222
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
coordinated efforts at the federal level. The following agencies
belong to this working group:
ᮣ
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health
ᮣ
Environmental Protection Agency
ᮣ
Federal Communications Commission
ᮣ
Occupational Safety and Health Administration
ᮣ
National Telecommunications and Information Administration
The National Institutes of Health participates in some interagency
working group activities, as well.
FDA shares regulatory responsibilities for wireless phones with the
Federal Communications Commission (FCC). All phones that are sold
in the United States must comply with FCC safety guidelines that limit
RF exposure. FCC relies on FDA and other health agencies for safety
questions about wireless phones.
FCC also regulates the base stations that the wireless phone networks
rely upon. While these base stations operate at higher power than do
the wireless phones themselves, the RF exposures that people get
from these base stations are typically thousands of times lower than
those they can get from wireless phones. Base stations are thus not
the primary subject of the safety questions discussed in this
document.
18. Whatkindsofphonesarethesubjectofthisupdate?
The term “wireless phone” refers here to hand-held wireless phones
with built-in antennas, often called “cell,” “mobile,” or “PCS” phones.
These types of wireless phones can expose the user to measurable
radiofrequency energy (RF) because of the short distance between
the phone and the user’s head. These RF exposures are limited by
Federal Communications Commission safety guidelines that were
developed with the advice of FDA and other federal health and safety
agencies. When the phone is located at greater distances from the
user, the exposure to RF is drastically lower because a person's RF
exposure decreases rapidly with increasing distance from the source.
The so-called “cordless phones,” which have a base unit connected to
the telephone wiring in a house, typically operate at far lower power
levels, and thus produce RF exposures well within the FCC's
compliance limits.
19. Whataretheresultsoftheresearchdonealready?
The research done thus far has produced conflicting results, and
many studies have suffered from flaws in their research methods.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
223
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Animal experiments investigating the effects of radiofrequency
energy (RF) exposures characteristic of wireless phones have yielded
conflicting results that often cannot be repeated in other
laboratories. A few animal studies, however, have suggested that low
levels of RF could accelerate the development of cancer in laboratory
animals. However, many of the studies that showed increased tumor
development used animals that had been genetically engineered or
treated with cancer-causing chemicals so as to be pre-disposed to
develop cancer in the absence of RF exposure. Other studies
exposed the animals to RF for up to 22 hours per day. These
conditions are not similar to the conditions under which people use
wireless phones, so we don’t know with certainty what the results of
such studies mean for human health.
Three large epidemiology studies have been published since
December 2000. Between them, the studies investigated any
possible association between the use of wireless phones and primary
brain cancer, glioma, meningioma, or acoustic neuroma, tumors of
the brain or salivary gland, leukemia, or other cancers. None of the
studies demonstrated the existence of any harmful health effects
from wireless phone RF exposures. However, none of the studies can
answer questions about long-term exposures, since the average
period of phone use in these studies was around three years.
20. WhatresearchisneededtodecidewhetherRFexposurefromwireless
phonesposesahealthrisk?
A combination of laboratory studies and epidemiological studies of
people actually using wireless phones would provide some of the
data that are needed. Lifetime animal exposure studies could be
completed in a few years. However, very large numbers of animals
would be needed to provide reliable proof of a cancer promoting
effect if one exists. Epidemiological studies can provide data that is
directly applicable to human populations, but 10 or more years’
follow-up may be needed to provide answers about some health
effects, such as cancer. This is because the interval between the time
of exposure to a cancer-causing agent and the time tumors develop –
if they do – may be many, many years. The interpretation of
epidemiological studies is hampered by difficulties in measuring
actual RF exposure during day-to-day use of wireless phones. Many
factors affect this measurement, such as the angle at which the phone
is held, or which model of phone is used.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
224
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
21. WhatisFDAdoingtofindoutmoreaboutthepossiblehealtheffectsof
wirelessphoneRF?
FDA is working with the U.S. National Toxicology Program and with
groups of investigators around the world to ensure that high priority
animal studies are conducted to address important questions about
the effects of exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF).
FDA has been a leading participant in the World Health Organization
International Electromagnetic Fields (EMF) Project since its
inception in 1996. An influential result of this work has been the
development of a detailed agenda of research needs that has driven
the establishment of new research programs around the world. The
Project has also helped develop a series of public information
documents on EMF issues.
FDA and the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association
(CTIA) have a formal Cooperative Research and Development
Agreement (CRADA) to do research on wireless phone safety. FDA
provides the scientific oversight, obtaining input from experts in
government, industry, and academic organizations. CTIA-funded
research is conducted through contracts to independent
investigators. The initial research will include both laboratory studies
and studies of wireless phone users. The CRADA will also include a
broad assessment of additional research needs in the context of the
latest research developments around the world.
22. WhatstepscanItaketoreducemyexposuretoradiofrequencyenergy
frommywirelessphone?
If there is a risk from these products – and at this point we do not
know that there is – it is probably very small. But if you are concerned
about avoiding even potential risks, you can take a few simple steps
to minimize your exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF). Since time
is a key factor in how much exposure a person receives, reducing the
amount of time spent using a wireless phone will reduce RF
exposure.
If you must conduct extended conversations by wireless phone
every day, you could place more distance between your body and the
source of the RF, since the exposure level drops off dramatically with
distance. For example, you could use a headset and carry the wireless
phone away from your body or use a wireless phone connected to a
remote antenna
Again, the scientific data do not demonstrate that wireless phones are
harmful. But if you are concerned about the RF exposure from these
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
225
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
products, you can use measures like those described above to reduce
your RF exposure from wireless phone use.
23. Whataboutchildrenusingwirelessphones?
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to users of wireless
phones, including children and teenagers. If you want to take steps to
lower exposure to radiofrequency energy (RF), the measures
described above would apply to children and teenagers using
wireless phones. Reducing the time of wireless phone use and
increasing the distance between the user and the RF source will
reduce RF exposure.
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have advised
that children be discouraged from using wireless phones at all. For
example, the government in the United Kingdom distributed leaflets
containing such a recommendation in December 2000. They noted
that no evidence exists that using a wireless phone causes brain
tumors or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit wireless
phone use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based on
scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.
24. Whataboutwirelessphoneinterferencewithmedicalequipment?
Radiofrequency energy (RF) from wireless phones can interact with
some electronic devices. For this reason, FDA helped develop a
detailed test method to measure electromagnetic interference (EMI)
of implanted cardiac pacemakers and defibrillators from wireless
telephones. This test method is now part of a standard sponsored by
the Association for the Advancement of Medical instrumentation
(AAMI). The final draft, a joint effort by FDA, medical device
manufacturers, and many other groups, was completed in late 2000.
This standard will allow manufacturers to ensure that cardiac
pacemakers and defibrillators are safe from wireless phone EMI.
FDA has tested hearing aids for interference from handheld wireless
phones and helped develop a voluntary standard sponsored by the
Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE). This standard
specifies test methods and performance requirements for hearing
aids and wireless phones so that that no interference occurs when a
person uses a “compatible” phone and a “compatible” hearing aid at
the same time. This standard was approved by the IEEE in 2000.
FDA continues to monitor the use of wireless phones for possible
interactions with other medical devices. Should harmful interference
be found to occur, FDA will conduct testing to assess the interference
and work to resolve the problem.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
226
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
25. Whichotherfederalagencieshaveresponsibilitiesrelatedtopotential
RFhealtheffects?
Certain agencies in the Federal Government have been involved in
monitoring, researching or regulating issues related to human
exposure to RF radiation. These agencies include the Food and Drug
Administration (FDA), the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),
the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), the
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH), the
National Telecommunications and Information Administration
(NTIA) and the Department of Defense (DOD).
By authority of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of
1968, the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the
FDA develops performance standards for the emission of radiation
from electronic products including X-ray equipment, other medical
devices, television sets, microwave ovens, laser products and
sunlamps. The CDRH established a product performance standard
for microwave ovens in 1971 limiting the amount of RF leakage from
ovens. However, the CDRH has not adopted performance standards
for other RF-emitting products. The FDA is, however, the lead federal
health agency in monitoring the latest research developments and
advising other agencies with respect to the safety of RF-emitting
products used by the public, such as cellular and PCS phones.
The FDA's microwave oven standard is an emission standard (as
opposed to an exposure standard) that allows specific levels of
microwave leakage (measured at five centimeters from the oven
surface). The standard also requires ovens to have two independent
interlock systems that prevent the oven from generating microwaves
the moment that the latch is released or the door of the oven is
opened. The FDA has stated that ovens that meet its standards and are
used according to the manufacturer's recommendations are safe for
consumer and industrial use. More information is available from:
The EPA has, in the past, considered developing federal guidelines for
public exposure to RF radiation. However, EPA activities related to RF
safety and health are presently limited to advisory functions. For
example, the EPA now chairs an Inter-agency Radiofrequency
Working Group, which coordinates RF health-related activities
among the various federal agencies with health or regulatory
responsibilities in this area.
OSHA is responsible for protecting workers from exposure to
hazardous chemical and physical agents. In 1971, OSHA issued a
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
227
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
protection guide for exposure of workers to RF radiation [29 CFR
1910.97]. However, this guide was later ruled to be only advisory and
not mandatory. Moreover, it was based on an earlier RF exposure
standard that has now been revised. At the present time, OSHA uses
the IEEE and/or FCC exposure guidelines for enforcement purposes
under OSHA's “general duty clause” (for more information see:
NIOSH is part of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services.
It conducts research and investigations into issues related to
occupational exposure to chemical and physical agents. NIOSH has,
in the past, undertaken to develop RF exposure guidelines for
workers, but final guidelines were never adopted by the agency.
NIOSH conducts safety-related RF studies through its Physical Agents
Effects Branch in Cincinnati,Ohio.
The NTIA is an agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce and is
responsible for authorizing Federal Government use of the RF
electromagnetic spectrum. Like the FCC, the NTIA also has NEPA
responsibilities and has considered adopting guidelines for
evaluating RF exposure from U.S. Government transmitters such as
radar and military facilities.
The Department of Defense (DOD) has conducted research on the
biological effects of RF energy for a number of years. This research is
now conducted primarily at the U.S. Air Force Research Laboratory
located at Brooks Air Force Base, Texas. The DOD Web site for RF
biological effects information is listed with other sites in conjunction
with a question on other sources of information, below.
26. Whofundsandcarriesoutresearchonthebiologicaleffectsof
RFenergy?
Research into possible biological effects of RF energy is carried out in
laboratories in the United States and around the world. In the U.S.,
most research has been funded by the Department of Defense, due to
the extensive military use of RF equipment such as radar and high-
powered radio transmitters. In addition, some federal agencies
responsible for health and safety, such as the Environmental
Protection Agency (EPA) and the U.S. Food and Drug Administration
(FDA), have sponsored and conducted research in this area. At the
present time, most of the non-military research on biological effects
of RF energy in the U.S. is being funded by industry organizations.
More research is being carried out overseas, particularly in Europe.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
228
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In 1996, the World Health Organization (WHO) established the
International EMF Project to review the scientific literature and work
towards resolution of health concerns over the use of RF technology.
WHO maintains a Web site that provides extensive information on
this project and about RF biological effects and research
FDA, EPA and other US government agencies responsible for public
health and safety have worked together and in connection with WHO
to monitor developments and identify research needs related to RF
biological effects.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
229
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Owner’s Record
The model number, regulatory number and serial number are located
on a nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial
number in the space provided below. This will be helpful if you need
to contact us about your phone in the future.
Model: PCS Phone VM4050
Serial No.:
User’s Guide Proprietary Notice
CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under
one or more of the following patents:
4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797
5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501
5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239
5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338
5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569
5,490,165 5,511,073
T9 Text Input is licensed by Tegic Communications and is covered by
U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554, U.S. Pat.
6,307,548 and other patents pending.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
230
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
End User License Agreement
This wireless device (“Device”) contains software owned by third
parties (“Software”). Each recipient (“User”) of this Device is granted
a non-exclusive, non-transferable, non-assignable license to use the
Software solely in conjunction with the Device on which it is
installed, for the duration of the useful life of such Device. Nothing
herein shall be construed as the sale of the Software to the User of
this Device. User shall not reproduce, modify, distribute, reverse
engineer, decompile or otherwise discover the source code of the
Software or any component of the Software. Each third party owner
is the sole and exclusive owner of and retains all rights, title and
interest in and to its Software. Each such third party shall be an
intended third party beneficiary of these terms.
THE SOFTWARE IS LICENSED TO YOU “AS IS.” ANY AND ALL
WARRANTIES REGARDING THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED, INCLUDING WITHOUT
LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS, MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THERE IS NO WARRANTY THAT THE
OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR
ERROR FREE. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE
EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY OR MAY BE LIMITED.
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4A: Safety
231
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 4B
Manufacturer’s Warranty
In This Section
ᮣ
Manufacturer’sWarranty
his section contains the manufacturer’s warranty for your
TPCS Phone.
For information about the Terms and Conditions of your PCS Service,
please see the Start Here guide included with your phone. For the
most recent version of the Terms and Conditions, please visit
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4B:Warranty
232
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manufacturer’s Warranty
12MONTHLIMITEDWARRANTY
Audiovox Communications Corp. (the Company) warrants to the
original retail purchaser of this Audiovox handheld portable cellular
telephone, that should this product or any part thereof during normal
consumer usage and conditions, be proven defective in material or
workmanship that results in product failure within the first twelve (12)
month period from the date of purchase, such defect(s) will be repaired
or replaced (with new or rebuilt parts) at the Company’s option, without
charge for parts or labor directly related to the defect(s).
The antenna, keypad, display, rechargeable battery and battery charger, if
included, are similarly warranted for twelve (12) months from date of
purchase.
This Warranty extends only to consumers who purchase the product in
the United States or Canada and it is not transferable or assignable.
This Warranty does not apply to:
(a) Product subjected to abnormal use or conditions, accident,
mishandling, neglect, unauthorized alteration, misuse, improper
installation or repair or improper storage;
(b) Product whose mechanical serial number or electronic serial number
has been removed, altered or defaced.
(c) Damage from exposure to moisture, humidity, excessive
temperatures or extreme environmental conditions;
(d) Damage resulting from connection to, or use of any accessory or
other product not approved or authorized by the Company;
(e) Defects in appearance, cosmetic, decorative or structural items such
as framing and non-operative parts;
(f) Product damaged from external causes such as fire, flooding, dirt,
sand, weather conditions, battery leakage, blown fuse, theft or
improper usage of any electrical source.
The Company disclaims liability for removal or reinstallation of the
product, for geographic coverage, for inadequate signal reception by the
antenna or for communications range or operation of the cellular system
as a whole.
To obtain repairs or replacement within the terms of this Warranty, the
product should be delivered with proof of Warranty coverage (e.g. dated
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4B:Warranty
233
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
bill of sale), the consumer’s return address, daytime phone number
and/or fax number and complete description of the problem,
transportation prepaid, to the Company at the address shown below or to
the place of purchase for repair or replacement processing. In addition,
for reference to an authorized Warranty station in your area, you may
telephone in the United States (800) 229-1235, and in Canada (800) 465-
9672 (in Ontario call 905-712-9299).
THE EXTENT OF THE COMPANY’S LIABILITY UNDER THIS WARRANTY
IS LIMITED TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT PROVIDED ABOVE AND,
IN NO EVENT, SHALL THE COMPANY’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE
PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY PURCHASER FOR THE PRODUCT.
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY
OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS WRITTEN WARRANTY.
ANY ACTION FOR BREACH OF ANY WARRANTY MUST BE BROUGHT
WITHIN A PERIOD OF 18 MONTHS FROM DATE OF ORIGINAL
PURCHASE. IN NO CASE SHALL THE COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES FOR BREACH
OF THIS OR ANY OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
WHATSOEVER. THE COMPANY SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR THE DELAY
IN RENDERING SERVICE UNDER THIS WARRANTY OR LOSS OF USE
DURING THE TIME THE PRODUCT IS BEING REPAIRED OR REPLACED.
No person or representative is authorized to assume for the Company any
liability other than expressed herein in connection with the sale of this
product.
Some states or provinces do not allow limitations on how long an implied
warranty lasts or the exclusion or limitation of incidental or
consequential damage so the above limitation or exclusions may not
apply to you. This Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may
also have other rights which vary from state to state or province to
province.
IN USA:
AUDIOVOX COMMUNICATIONS CORP.
555 Wireless Blvd.
Hauppauge, NY 11788
(800) 229-1235
IN CANADA: AUDIOVOX COMMUNICATIONS CANADA CO.
5155 Spectrum Way, Unit #5
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 5A1
(800) 465-9672
Section 4: Safety Guidelines and Warranty Information
4B:Warranty
234
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Powered by JBlend®
,
©1997-2003 Aplix Corporation. All rights reserved. Java and all Java-based trademarks and
logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. JBlend and
all JBlend-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aplix Corporation in Japan and
other countries.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Consumer Information on
Wireless Phones 212-229
Count Down Timer 98
Index
Numerics
3-Way Calling 149
911 18
D
Desktop Charger 14
Display Direction 44
Display Screen Icons 10
Display Settings 37-44
A
Abbreviated Dialing 25, 49
Airplane Mode 45
Alarm Clock 97
Alert Notification 36
Answering Calls 17
Any Key Answer 47
Auto Answer 48
E
Email See PCS Mail
Emergency Numbers 18
Entering Text 26
Extended Absence Greeting 146
B
F
Backlight 37-38
Battery
Finding Internal Phone Book
Entries 77
Capacity 13
Charging 14
Installing 13
Removing 14
Browser Menu 189
G
Games 179
Greeting 37
Group List 89
H
C
Help 4
Calculator 99
Call Forwarding 150
Call Guard 61
Call History 70-73
Erasing 73
Making a Call From 72
Options 71
Saving a Number From 72
Viewing 71
Call Waiting 148
Caller ID 148
Camcorder
Camcorder Mode 117
Taking Videos 116
Camera
Camera Mode 113
Taking Pictures 110
Chat 176
I
Internal Phone Book
Adding a Number 79
Adding an Entry 76
Dialing From 24
Editing 80
Erasing 85
Finding an Entry 77
Secret Entries 83
Introduction ii
K
Key Tone Length 34
L
Language 48
Location Settings 44
Lock Code 54
Lock Mode 54
Locking Your Phone 53
Clock Display 42
Index
236
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
Phone (illus.) 8
Making Calls 16
Manufacturer’s Warranty 232
Menus 62-69
Diagram 65-67
My 68-69
Navigation 63
Structure 63
Phone Book Match Dialing 49,86
Phone Features 11
Phone Information 51
Phone Number
Dialing With Pauses 23
Displaying 16
Finding 23
Messaging 163
PCS Mail 173
Updates 172
Saving 22
Picture Mail 158 See also Camera
Password 158
Picture Mail Website 162
Sharing Picture/Video Mail 158
Missed Call Notification 18
N
Net Guard 154
R
Resetting Your Phone 56
Ringer Types 31
Roaming 57-61
Analog Networks 59
Call Guard 61
O
Open to Answer 47
P
PCS Business Connection 193
PCS Callback 144
PCS Mail 173
Digital Networks 58
Roam Mode 60
PCS Services
S
Call Forwarding 150
Call Waiting 148
Caller ID 148
Customer Solutions 5
Dialing 86
Directory Assistance 5
Operator Services 5
PCS Vision
Bookmarks 190-191
Chat 176
Downloading Applications 187
FAQs 194
Games 179
Messaging 163
Ringers 181
Screen Savers 184
User Name 152
PCS Voice Command 195-197
Personal Organizer 92-99
Safety 199-231
Saving a Phone Number 22
Scheduler 93
Adding an Event 93
Erasing Events 95
Event Alerts 94
Options 94
Screen Savers 184
Security Menu 53
Security Settings 52-56
Setup Options 47-51
Silence 36
Sound Settings 31
Special Numbers 55
Speed Dialing 24, 48, 87
Storing Pictures 124
Storing Videos 130
Index
237
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
T
Taking Pictures 110
Taking Videos 116
Three-Way Calling 149
TTY Use 45
Turning Your Phone Off 12
Turning Your Phone On 12
U
Unlocking Your Phone 3, 53
Updates 172
V
Vision Home Page 153
Voice Memos 105-108
Voice-Activated Dialing 101
Voice Guidance 50
Voicemail
Clearing the Icon 146
Expert Mode 144
Menu 147
Message Alerts 142
Notification 142
Options 144
Retrieving 143
Setting Up 4, 142
Volume Settings 35
W
Warranty 232
Web
Browsing 189
Launching 153
Index
238
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|